JP2016015999A - Game device - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To allow it to be recognized that setting is beyond a prescribed range when operation for setting/changing sound volume beyond the prescribed range in a game device is performed.SOLUTION: In a first game system 1A, a data display device 4 to be a kind of a game device is provided in correspondence with a Pachinko machine 2. The data display device 4 is provided with: an operation unit; a sound output part; sound volume setting means for setting volume of specific sound outputted by the sound output part; sound volume change means for changing the sound volume in accordance with operation of the operation unit; and confirmation sound output means which outputs from the sound output part confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set after the operation unit is operated. The sound volume setting means can set the sound volume within a prescribed range. The confirmation sound output means outputs from the sound output part confirmation sound corresponding to a sound volume at the limit of the prescribed range when the operation unit is operated so as to change the sound volume outside the limit of the prescribed range in the case that the sound volume to be set is at the limit of the prescribed range.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming apparatus provided corresponding to a gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine installed in a pachinko shop or a slot shop, there is one in which a player playing with the gaming machine can set / change the volume of the production sound flowing during the production to a desired value. In such a gaming machine, the player can set / change the volume by using an operation key such as a cross key, and the player confirms the volume confirmation sound according to the volume level of the effect sound after the setting / change. However, it is possible to set the volume of the production sound by actually hearing and confirming (for example, Patent Document 1).

  There is also a gaming machine in which the volume level can be set / changed by operating the jog dial. In this type of gaming machine, the volume level is displayed on the display device of the gaming machine and the current volume level is notified. An announcement is made to flow at a set volume level (for example, Patent Document 2).

JP 2011-229766 A JP 2012-223390 A

In stores where game machines are installed as described above, game devices such as a call lamp device, a data display device, each counter, and a card unit are provided in association with the game machines. These gaming devices include a display unit and a sound output unit, and display information related to a game on the gaming machine (for example, game data such as the number of jackpots) or a specific effect (for example, a jackpot effect). Go,
For example, there is a notification for preventing a player from forgetting to take a card used for a game.

  It is conceivable that the above-described gaming machine capable of setting / changing the volume is similarly applied to a gaming device including a sound output unit. However, when the techniques of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 are to be applied to a gaming device as they are, the techniques of Patent Document 1 and Patent Document 2 require an operation for setting / changing the volume beyond a predetermined range. The confirmation sound output when it is made is not taken into account, and customers who try to set / change the volume may not be aware that they are trying to set / change the volume beyond the specified range. There is a problem that it takes time to set the volume.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and the object of the present invention is to exceed the predetermined range when an operation for setting / changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed. An object of the present invention is to propose a gaming apparatus that makes it possible to recognize that it is going to be set.

  The present invention employs the following means in order to solve the above problems. In addition, although the code | symbol used in description of the form for implementing invention mentioned later and drawing is added for reference, the component of this invention is not limited to what attached | subjected this code | symbol.

The invention according to means 1
Game devices (card unit 3, data display device 4, inter-unit counting unit 5, each unit counter) provided corresponding to gaming machines (pachinko machine 2, slot machine, encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, encapsulated slot machine) 7. Calling lamp device 9),
An operation unit (operation button 316, operation unit 420, operation unit of another gaming device);
A sound output unit (sound output unit 350, sound output unit 450, sound output unit 750, sound output unit 950, sound output unit of another gaming device);
Specific sound output from the sound output unit (sound and music of various videos, notification of forgetting to remove a card, notification of counting the number of possessed balls, fanfare sound congratulating the occurrence of a big hit, player Volume setting means (processing unit 310: volume setting unit 310b, processing unit 410: volume setting, etc.) for setting the volume of the breaking notification sound for notifying that the number of possessed balls has exceeded the specified number, the clerk calling sound, etc. Part 416, the processing part of another gaming device),
Volume changing means for changing the volume set by the volume setting means according to the operation of the operation section (processing section 310: volume changing section 310c, processing section 410: volume changing section 417, for other games) The processing section of the device),
When the operation unit is operated, a confirmation sound output unit (processing unit 310: confirmation sound output control unit) outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set by the volume setting unit after the operation from the sound output unit. 310f, processing unit 410: confirmation sound output control unit 415, processing unit of other gaming device),
With
The volume setting means can set the volume within a predetermined range (a volume changeable range of “2” to “14”),
The confirmation sound output means, when the volume set by the volume setting means is within a predetermined range limit (“2”, “14”), the volume is outside the predetermined range limit (“2”). When the operation unit is operated so as to change the sound volume to a volume lower than “14”, a confirmation sound (“2”, “14”) corresponding to the limit volume (“2”, “14”) within the predetermined range. The game device is characterized in that a sound effect (voice voice) is output from the sound output unit (volume change processing in FIG. 30: N3: Yes → N5, N7; Yes → N9).
According to this, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed in the gaming apparatus, a confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the limit volume exceeding the predetermined range is output. It is possible to make the store visitor recognize that the volume is to be changed beyond the threshold.

The invention according to means 2
A gaming device according to means 1, comprising:
When the sound output unit outputs the specific sound, volume change by the volume change unit is limited (P10 in FIG. 38; Yes → P12 → M25). Volume change limit unit (processing unit 310, processing unit 410) ) Is further provided.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific sound and the confirmation sound from being output in duplicate by restricting the volume change when the specific sound is being output.

The invention according to means 3 is
A gaming device according to means 1 or 2, wherein
A display unit (display unit 355, first display unit 430);
The first operation (the channel of the setting changeover switch 360, 460) when the first permission condition for the store where the gaming apparatus is installed (the state where the setting changeover switch 360, 460 is operable) is established. The first setting means (processing unit 310: setting unit) sets one of the plurality of volume levels as a first volume level (a volume level set by a store) based on the fact that the switching operation is performed. Volume setting section 310b, processing section 410: volume setting section 416),
A second operation (operation button 316, operation unit) when a second permission condition (a state in which the volume change operation by the visitor is possible) for a customer including a player who plays with the gaming machine is satisfied. Second setting means (processing unit 310) that sets any one of the plurality of volume levels as a second volume level (a volume level set by the customer) based on the operation performed on 420. : Volume setting unit 310b, processing unit 410: volume setting unit 416),
Specific sound output control means (processing) for outputting the specific sound from the sound output unit at a volume based on the first volume level set by the first setting means and the second volume level set by the second setting means Unit 310: specific sound output control unit 310e, processing unit 410: specific sound output control unit 414),
When the second operation is performed, control is performed to display on the display unit a stage display indicating the second volume stage (one of a plurality of volume stages highlighted as the second volume stage). Display control means (processing unit 310, processing unit 410);
It is further provided with the game device characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to this, it is possible to individually set the volume level on the store side and the visitor side by providing the permission conditions for the store and the visitor separately. Further, when a setting operation is performed by a customer, the customer can be notified of the volume level in a visible manner.

The invention according to means 4 is
A gaming device according to means 3, comprising:
An operation device (setting changeover switch) having a displacement portion (knob) configured to be able to be displaced to any one of positions corresponding to a plurality of volume levels that can be taken by the first volume level according to the first operation. 360, 460),
The first setting means sets a first volume level corresponding to the position of the displacement portion (knob setting position) displaced according to the first operation as a first volume level based on the first operation ( 29. A game apparatus characterized by M1 to M7) of the volume setting process of FIG.
According to this, the volume level can be easily set on the store side by operating the operation device.

The invention according to means 5 is
A gaming device according to means 3 or 4, wherein
The plurality of volume levels that can be taken by the first volume level includes a limit level (channels “A” to “F”) that restricts the second setting means from setting the second volume level,
When the restriction stage is set as the first volume stage by the first setting means, setting restriction is performed to restrict the second setting means from setting the second volume stage (volume etc. in FIG. 29). Setting processing M3; Yes → M5, and when the channel is set to “A” to “F”, further includes setting restriction means (a processing unit 310, a processing unit 410) that restricts a volume change by a visitor. This is a gaming apparatus characterized by the above.
According to this, the volume setting by the customer can be restricted, and it is possible to prevent the specific sound from being output at a volume that the store does not intend.

The invention according to means 6 is
A gaming device according to means 5, comprising:
When the second operation is performed when the setting restriction is performed by the setting restriction means, a notification that the setting of the second sound volume stage is restricted (volume change by the visitor is restricted) A display message, a voice message, and notification means (display unit 355, first display unit 430, sound output unit 350, sound output unit 450, light emitting unit 455). Device.
According to this, it is possible to effectively notify the customer that the volume setting by the customer is restricted.

The invention according to means 7
A gaming device according to any one of means 1-6,
Setting of the predetermined range (volume setting data 693, channel setting) from a management device (a management device such as the hall computer 6) provided in the store where the gaming machine is installed and capable of setting the predetermined range for each gaming device. ) Further receiving setting receiving means (second communication unit 480),
The volume setting means is a gaming apparatus characterized in that the volume is set based on the setting received by the setting receiving means.
According to this, the changeable volume range can be set on the store side.

The invention according to means 8 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 7, wherein
The gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be played using game media (game balls, game medals),
The gaming device is:
A display unit (display unit 355, first display unit 430, display unit 730, display unit 930) capable of displaying an image;
When the number of possessed game media (number of possessed balls, number of possessed medals) possessed by a player who plays with the gaming machine reaches a first value (first display threshold), a predetermined image (dollar box, thousand box, Display control processing for displaying the display unit on the display unit), and when the predetermined image is displayed on the display unit, the number of possessed game media has the first value. Even if the value is lower than the first value, a predetermined number of times (difference between the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value: for example, 125 balls, which is the number of game balls paid out once, and one game medal payout The predetermined image is not hidden if it reaches a small second value (first non-display threshold) that is the number 50 or a predetermined set value), and the predetermined image is displayed when the predetermined value falls below the second value. Display processing means (processing unit 31) capable of executing a non-display control process for making an image non-display , A processing unit 410),
Furthermore, it is provided with the game device characterized by the above-mentioned.
According to this, by displaying a predetermined image based on the number of possessed game media, it is possible to realize an intuitively easy-to-understand display showing the number of game media possessed by the player and the game state. Further, the second value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing the difference between the first value and the second value for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent frequent switching between display / non-display of the predetermined image due to increase / decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

The invention according to means 9 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 8, wherein
When the volume set by the volume setting unit is within a predetermined range limit (“2”, “14”), the volume changing unit adjusts the volume within the predetermined range (“2” to “14”). When the operation unit is operated so as to change within the range, the volume is changed, and the volume is outside the limit of the predetermined range (a volume smaller than “2”, smaller than “14”). When the operation unit is operated so as to be changed to (large volume), the volume is not changed (N3: Yes → N15 → N17, N7: Yes → N9 → N17 in the volume changing process in FIG. 30). It is the game device characterized.
According to this, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed, the volume is not changed, thereby preventing a specific sound having a volume exceeding the predetermined range from being output. can do.

The invention according to means 10 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 1-9,
When the operation interval from the time when one operation is performed on the operation unit to the time when another operation is performed is shorter than a predetermined interval (the output time of the confirmation sound), the volume changing unit responds to the other operation. The game apparatus is characterized in that the volume is not changed (N1 of volume change processing in FIG. 30; Yes → N9 to N23).
According to this, it is possible to prevent an unintended volume setting from being performed when an operation for continuously changing the volume is performed.

The invention according to means 11 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 1 to 10, wherein
The confirmation sound output means is a time during which an operation interval from when one operation to the operation unit is performed until another operation is performed is a confirmation sound output time according to the one operation (output time of confirmation sound) If it is longer, the confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the other operation is output from the sound output unit (N1 of volume change processing in FIG. 30; No → N15), and the operation interval is the one operation. When the confirmation sound is shorter than the time for outputting the confirmation sound, the confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the other operation is not output from the sound output unit (N1 in the volume changing process in FIG. 30; Yes → N19). N23) is a gaming apparatus characterized by the above.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the customer who performed the change operation from being confused by the output of the confirmation sound by one operation and the output of the confirmation sound by another operation.

The invention according to means 12 is
A gaming device according to means 11, comprising:
The operation unit can receive the other operation a plurality of times after the one operation is performed (a volume change operation by a visitor can be received a plurality of times),
The confirmation sound output means outputs the confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the one operation from the sound output unit when the confirmation sound is not output from the sound output unit a plurality of times. The confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the other operation is output from the sound output unit (confirmation in which the volume of the confirmation sound for next output stored in R17 of the third sound volume changing process in FIG. 42 is newly set) The game apparatus is characterized in that the sound is updated to a sound volume and the confirmation sound is output.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the player who performed the changing operation from being confused due to the output of the confirmation sound by a plurality of other operations.

The invention according to means 13 is
A gaming device described in means 4, comprising:
The specific sound output control means sets the first sound level newly set by the first setting means when the step display is displayed by the display control means after the position of the displacement portion is changed. The gaming apparatus is characterized by starting to output the specific sound from the sound output unit at a sound volume corresponding to the sound volume (M1 to M7 in the sound volume setting process in FIG. 29).
According to this, after displaying the stage display, it is possible to start outputting the specific sound at a volume corresponding to the volume stage set on the store side.

The invention according to means 14 is
A gaming device described in means 4 or 13,
The specific sound output control means is newly set by the first setting means when the second volume level set by the second setting means is changed after the position of the displacement portion is changed. It is a gaming apparatus characterized by starting to output the specific sound from the sound output unit at a volume corresponding to the first volume level (M1 to M7 in the volume setting process in FIG. 29).
According to this, when the volume level is changed by the customer, the output of the specific sound can be started at a volume corresponding to the volume level set on the store side.

The invention according to means 15 is
A gaming device according to means 5 or 6, wherein
When the setting restriction is not performed by the setting restriction unit, the display control unit displays a corresponding image (a volume / light quantity change icon or a volume / light quantity change icon) indicating that the second permission condition is satisfied. An image indicating an item) is displayed on the display unit, and when the setting restriction is performed, the corresponding image is not displayed on the display unit.
According to this, it is possible to effectively notify the customer that the volume setting by the customer is restricted.

The invention according to means 16 is
A gaming device described in any one of means 3 to 6,
The display control means increases the second volume level displayed as the initial display when the level display is displayed as the first volume level set by the first setting means is higher (FIG. 32 ( 2) and FIG. 33 (3)).
According to this, the relationship between the first volume level and the second volume level can be clarified, and the customer can easily understand the volume level.

The invention according to means 17 is
A gaming device described in any one of means 3 to 6,
When the second volume level is newly set by the second setting means, the confirmation sound output means outputs a confirmation sound indicating that fact from the sound output section, and the first setting means outputs the confirmation sound. When the first volume level is newly set, a confirmation sound indicating that is not output from the sound output unit (a confirmation sound is output when the volume is changed by a change operation of the visitor, (A confirmation sound is not output when the volume is changed by a store-side change operation).
According to this, the customer can grasp the setting of the second volume level by the confirmation sound.

The invention according to means 18 is
A gaming device described in any one of means 3 to 6,
The second setting means clears the second volume level being set at a predetermined timing (a timing when it is determined that the game by the player has ended), and sets an initial volume level (initial volume) as the second volume level. Is configurable,
The first setting means can change the first volume level only based on the first operation (the setting change-over switches 360 and 460 are physical switches and do not have a reset). Device.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific sound from being output while the volume level set by the customer is unintentionally dragged.

The invention according to means 19 is
A gaming device according to means 8, comprising:
Further comprising a possessed game medium number counting means (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of possessed game media;
The display processing means executes the display control process and the non-display control process based on the number of possessed game media (the counted number of game balls and game medals) counted by the possessed game media number counting means. This is a gaming apparatus characterized by the above.
According to this, display control / non-display control of a predetermined image according to the number of possessed game media can be appropriately performed based on the count result of the possessed game media count unit.

The invention according to means 20 is
A gaming device according to means 19, comprising:
The game media is paid back to the player within the range of the number of possessed game media (game media is refunded by control of the card unit 3, game media is refunded by a nozzle, game in an enclosed pachinko machine 2B or an enclosed slot machine) Further including a refund control means (counting payout unit 380) for performing control for including a deduction based on the medium lending operation.
The possessed game medium number counting means includes an accepted game medium number counting means (counting sensor of the count payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of received game media, and the counting result of the received game medium number counting means and the payout The gaming device is characterized in that the number of possessed game media is updated based on the number of payouts by the control means (the number of payouts of game balls or game medals).
According to this, it becomes possible to count the number of possessed game media accurately by updating the number of possessed game media based on the count result of the received game media and the payout number of the game media, and display control of a predetermined image / Hide control can be performed accurately.

The invention according to means 21 is
A gaming device according to means 8, comprising:
A signal receiving means (third communication unit 485) for receiving a signal capable of specifying the number of possessed game media;
The display processing means is a gaming apparatus characterized by executing the display control process and the non-display control process based on a signal received by the signal receiving means.
According to this, display control / non-display control of a predetermined image according to the number of possessed game media can be performed based on the signal that can specify the number of possessed game media.

The invention according to means 22
A gaming device according to means 21, comprising:
The signal that can specify the number of possessed game media is intermittent timing (timing at predetermined time intervals, timing when the counting result of the counting payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, and counting up of the counting payout unit 380 is lost. When the specified time has passed, the count is confirmed and sent at the timing of waiting for the confirmation)
The display processing means is a gaming apparatus characterized in that the display control process and the non-display control process are executed based on a signal transmitted at the intermittent timing received by the receiving means.
According to this, display / non-display of the predetermined image is performed by executing the display control process and the non-display control process of the predetermined image based on the signal that can specify the number of possessed game media transmitted at intermittent timing. It is possible to prevent frequent switching.

The invention according to means 23 is
A gaming device described in any one of means 8 and 19-22,
While the predetermined image is being displayed, the display processing means has a predetermined opportunity (pachinko machine 2 or slot machine with a single payout of game balls or medals, enclosed pachinko machine 2B, Number of game media to be decreased (125 balls, which is the number of game balls paid out once, number of game medals paid out once) The predetermined number (200 balls with a margin for 125 balls of game balls), 75 sheets with a margin for 50 games medals, Executing the non-display control process for making the predetermined image non-display when the value is less than the second value smaller than the first value). It is the game device characterized.
According to this, the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value can be optimized based on the number that the number of possessed game media decreases at a predetermined opportunity. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold.

The invention according to means 24 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 8 and 19-23,
The display processing means performs a step display update process (increasing the display number of the dollar box, increasing the display step of the ball bulk or the medal bulk) for updating the display of the predetermined image step by step according to the number of the possessed game media. Is feasible,
It is possible to specify the display stage of the displayed predetermined image (update the display counter value according to the display stage, add a first non-display threshold to a predetermined reference game medium number (for example, an integral multiple of the first display threshold) A display flag with reference to the number of display units), and storage means (RAM 330, storage unit 490: first display counter value, display flag) for storing.
The display processing means, based on the display stage stored in the storage means and the number of possessed game media, the display stage of the predetermined image in the stage display update process (the number of dollar box displays, the ball volume and the medal volume). The game apparatus is characterized in that the number of display stages) is determined.
According to this, by storing the display stage of the displayed predetermined image in an identifiable manner, particularly when the predetermined number of game media is a number between the first value and the second value, the predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to appropriately determine whether or not to be displayed.

The invention according to means 25 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 8 and 19 to 24,
The display processing means hides the predetermined image when the number of possessed game media reaches a third value (second display threshold value) that is larger than the first value (dollar box, thousand box, Second display for displaying a second predetermined image different from the predetermined image (a special box, a box, a new display of the ball volume and the medal volume). A gaming apparatus characterized in that a display control process can be executed.
According to this, since the second predetermined image can be newly displayed while the predetermined image is not displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of possessed game media, the display width can be further expanded.

The invention according to means 26 is
A gaming device according to any one of means 8 and 19 to 24,
The display processing means continues the display of the predetermined image when the number of possessed game media reaches a third value (second display threshold) that is larger than the first value (dollar box, thousands of boxes, ball bulk). And a second display for displaying a second predetermined image (special box, a box, and a new step display of the ball and the medal bulk). A gaming apparatus characterized by being capable of executing control processing.
According to this, since the predetermined image can be continuously displayed and the second predetermined image can be newly displayed in accordance with the increase in the number of possessed game media, the display width can be further widened.

The invention according to means 27 is
A gaming device according to means 25 or 26, wherein
When the second predetermined image is displayed, the display processing means is configured such that the number of possessed game media is a second predetermined number more than the third value (the difference between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold). : For example, 125 balls, which is the number of payouts for a game ball, 200 balls with a certain allowance, 50 cards, which is the number of payouts for a game medal, and a certain allowance If the fourth predetermined value (75 or a predetermined set value) has reached a small fourth value (second non-display threshold), the second predetermined image is not hidden and the second value is below the fourth value. A gaming apparatus characterized by being capable of executing a second non-display control process for making a predetermined image non-displayable.
According to this, a second predetermined image can be newly displayed as the number of possessed game media increases. The fourth value for hiding the second predetermined image is smaller by a second predetermined number than the third value for displaying the second predetermined image. By providing the difference between the third value and the fourth value for the second predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the second predetermined image from being frequently switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed game media just before the threshold. be able to.

The invention according to means 28 is
A gaming device described in means 27,
When the predetermined image is displayed, the display processing means is configured such that the number of possessed game media is equal to the predetermined number of times than the first value (difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold: When the number of gaming balls is 200, the number of gaming medals is 75, or a predetermined first setting value is smaller than the second value, the non-display control process is executed, and the second predetermined image is displayed. The number of game media possessed is set to a value equal to the second predetermined number (the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value) set as a value larger than the difference between the first value and the second value. Difference: For example, 400 balls for game balls, 150 games medals, or a predetermined second set value) When the fourth value smaller than the second value falls below the second non-display control process A gaming device characterized by being executed.
According to this, the second predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the third value and the fourth value is larger than the predetermined number corresponding to the difference between the first value and the second value. For this reason, the second predetermined image can be made less likely to be hidden compared to the predetermined image.

The invention according to means 29 is
Provided for gaming machines (pachinko machine 2, slot machine, encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, encapsulated slot machine), and player-owned gaming value (number of possessed balls, number of medals, remaining prepaid, remaining card) Use processing means for performing use processing (processing for controlling game media to be paid out from the gaming machine, processing for paying out game media from its own device (for example, using a nozzle)) (Control unit 300) and a confirmation process for determining a game value that has not been used for the use process (returning / issuing a card in which the number of possessed game media is written, sending the number of possessed game media to the management device Confirmation processing means (control unit 300) for returning / issuing the card, and a recording medium (member card, visitor card) capable of specifying the game value confirmed by the confirmation processing. Receiving means (card reader / writer 327) for receiving a game card such as a game card, and based on the reception means receiving the recording medium, the game value specified from the recording medium is used as the use process. A recording medium processing apparatus (card unit 3, inter-unit counting unit 5) that can be used for
An operation unit (operation button 316: volume / light quantity change button 316d);
A sound output unit (sound output unit 350);
Volume setting means (processing unit 310: volume setting unit 310b) for setting the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit;
Volume changing means (processing unit 310: volume changing unit 310c) for changing the volume set by the volume setting unit according to the operation of the operation unit;
When the operation unit is operated, a confirmation sound output unit (processing unit 310: confirmation sound output control unit) outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set by the volume setting unit after the operation from the sound output unit. 310f)
With
The volume setting means can set the volume within a predetermined range (a volume changeable range of “2” to “14”),
The confirmation sound output means, when the volume set by the volume setting means is within a predetermined range limit (“2”, “14”), the volume is outside the predetermined range limit (“2”). When the operation unit is operated so as to change the sound volume to a volume lower than “14”, a confirmation sound (“2”, “14”) corresponding to the limit volume (“2”, “14”) within the predetermined range. The recording medium processing apparatus is characterized in that a sound effect and a voice voice) are output from the sound output unit (N3 in the volume changing process in FIG. 30: Yes → N5, N7; Yes → N9).
According to this, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed in the recording medium processing apparatus, a confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the limit volume exceeding the predetermined range is output. Recognize that you are changing the volume beyond the range.

The invention according to means 30 is
A recording medium processing apparatus described in means 29, comprising:
Possessed game medium number counting means (counting payout unit 380) capable of counting the number of possessed game media possessed by the player;
A counting volume change limiting means (processing unit 310) that limits the volume change by the volume changing means during counting by the possessed game medium number counting means (when the counting payout unit 380 is counting the number of possessed balls); ,
Is a recording medium processing apparatus.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the volume from being changed while counting the number of game media possessed by the player.

Each of the means 2 to 28 can be similarly applied to the recording medium processing apparatus described in the means 29 or 30.
According to this, it is possible to provide a recording medium processing apparatus that exhibits the same effects as the inventions according to the above means 2 to 28.

The invention according to means 31 is
A plurality of gaming machines (pachinko machine 2, slot machine, encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, encapsulated slot machine) provided for each game device (card unit 3, data display device 4, inter-unit counting unit 5, A gaming system (a first gaming system 1A to a third gaming system 1C) including a table counter 7 and a calling lamp device 9),
The gaming device is:
An operation unit (operation button 316, operation unit 420, operation unit of another gaming device);
A sound output unit (sound output unit 350, sound output unit 450, sound output unit 750, sound output unit 950, sound output unit of another gaming device);
With
Specific sound output from the sound output unit (sound and music of various images, announcement of forgetting to remove a card, fanfare sound congratulating the jackpot, breakthrough notification sound for notifying that the number of possessed balls of the player has exceeded the specified number, Volume setting means (processing section 310: volume setting section 310b, processing section 410: volume setting section 416, processing section of other gaming devices) for setting the volume of a store clerk's ringing tone,
Volume changing means for changing the volume set by the volume setting means according to the operation of the operation section (processing section 310: volume changing section 310c, processing section 410: volume changing section 417, for other games) The processing section of the device),
When the operation unit is operated, a confirmation sound output unit (processing unit 310: confirmation sound output control unit) outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set by the volume setting unit after the operation from the sound output unit. 310f, processing unit 410: confirmation sound output control unit 415, processing unit of other gaming device),
With
The volume setting means can set the volume within a predetermined range (range volume of “2” to “14”),
The confirmation sound output means, when the volume set by the volume setting means is within a predetermined range limit (“2”, “14”), the volume is outside the predetermined range limit (“2”). When the operation unit is operated so as to change the sound volume to a volume lower than “14”, a confirmation sound (“2”, “14”) corresponding to the limit volume (“2”, “14”) within the predetermined range. The game system is characterized in that sound effects (voice sounds) are output from the sound output unit (volume change processing in FIG. 30: N3: Yes → N5, N7; Yes → N9).
According to this, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed in the gaming apparatus, a confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the limit volume exceeding the predetermined range is output. It is possible to recognize that the volume is going to be changed beyond.

The invention according to means 32 is
A gaming system described in means 31, comprising:
A management device provided in a store where the gaming machine is installed,
A predetermined range setting means (volume setting unit 615) capable of setting the predetermined range for each gaming device;
Setting transmission means (second communication unit 650) for transmitting the setting of the predetermined range (volume setting data 693, channel setting) by the predetermined range setting means to the gaming device;
A management device (a management device such as a hall computer 6) provided with
The gaming device is:
The volume setting means (processing section 310: volume setting section 310b, processing section 410: volume setting section 416, processing section of other gaming devices),
The volume changing means (processing section 310: volume changing section 310c, processing section 410: volume changing section 417, processing section of other gaming device);
Setting receiving means for receiving the setting transmitted from the transmission setting means (the communication unit of the card unit 3, the second communication unit 480, the communication unit of another gaming device);
With
The volume setting unit is a gaming system characterized in that the volume is set based on the setting received by the setting receiving unit.
According to this, the changeable volume range can be set on the store side.

It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 1st game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of a pachinko machine and a counter-counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of an inter-counter counting unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a hall computer. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a display content setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the display setting table at the time of simultaneous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for a 1st display part display mode setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the 2nd display part display mode setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for volume settings. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the light quantity setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of a game total database. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for a display. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for sound volumes. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the setting data for light quantity. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an external appearance structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the housing of the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a structure of a setting switch. It is a figure which shows an example of the threshold value table for possession ball special displays. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a management process. It is a continuation of the management process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a display process. This is a continuation of the display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a possessed ball special display process. It is explanatory drawing of the principle of possessed ball special display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a volume etc. setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a volume change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a counter-counting unit process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 1st display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 1st display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of a possessed ball special display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a possessed ball special display screen. It is a figure which shows an example of a possessed ball special display screen. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd volume etc. setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 1st display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 1st display part of a data display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd volume change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 3rd volume change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 4th volume change process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the 1st display part of a data display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd possessed ball special display process. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 2nd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the flow of the information and signal in a 2nd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of a pachinko machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a function structure of a possession management computer. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of member management data. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of card | curd management data. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a card unit process. It is a continuation of the card unit processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a holding ball total process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a holding ball division | segmentation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display part of a card unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of a 2nd card unit process. This is a continuation of the second card unit process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display part of a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type | mold total graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the game type | mold total graph displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of a firing intensity threshold range table. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the passage area data according to discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of a data structure of the implantation area | region data classified by discharge intensity. It is a figure which shows an example of the total graph according to discharge intensity displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the external appearance structure of a sealing type pachinko machine and a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of a 3rd game system. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information of the own shop displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus, and another shop. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of each counter. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the display content setting table in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the 2nd display part display mode setting table in a modification. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the possessed ball special display displayed on the 2nd display part of a data display apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of the table structure of the table for light emission setting. It is a figure which shows an example of the system configuration | structure of the game system in a modification.

  Hereinafter, an example of a preferred embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. However, embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the embodiments described below.

[1. First Embodiment]
[1-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a first gaming system 1A according to the first embodiment. The first gaming system 1A is a kind of a plurality of pachinko machines 2 which are a kind of gaming machines installed on a game island (not shown), and a gaming apparatus and an information display apparatus provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2. A certain data display device 4, a gaming device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, a counter unit 5 which is a kind of a counting device and a recording medium processing device, and a hall computer which is a kind of a management device and a control device 6 and a ball management computer 8 which is a kind of management device and control device.

  The pachinko machine 2 in the present embodiment is capable of playing using a game ball (pachinko ball) which is a kind of game medium, and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other. A variable display means (for example, a special symbol display) for deriving and displaying the result, and a specific game advantageous to the player when the display result derived and displayed on the variable display means becomes a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) This is a gaming machine controlled to a state (for example, a big hit gaming state).

  Each pachinko machine 2 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and each pachinko machine 2, data display device 4, and inter-counter counting unit 5 are connected to a hall computer 6 or a ball management computer via a machine terminal 10. 8 is connected. In FIG. 1, for the sake of simplicity, four pachinko machines 2 installed on the amusement island are illustrated.

  Information display for displaying various information such as game information related to games on the pachinko machine 2 and store information related to store sales, at a predetermined position above each pachinko machine 2 installed on the amusement island A data display device 4 which is a kind of device is installed. As will be described later, the data display device 4 has two display units, a first display unit 430 and a second display unit 440, and displays different data in the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. . Since the data display device 4 is a terminal that discloses information to a player or a player, it can also be referred to as an information disclosure terminal.

  In the present embodiment, the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 is configured to include the touch panel 421, and the call icon, menu icon, and version information icon displayed on the first display unit 430 are displayed on the player. By tapping, it is possible to call a store clerk, select a menu (wagon service, hand towel, meal break, etc.), and instruct to display the version information of the pachinko machine 2. Therefore, the data display device 4 can be rephrased as a calling lamp device.

  The data display device 4 includes a sound output unit 450 having a speaker, and is configured to be able to output a specific sound and a confirmation sound, which will be described later, from the sound output unit 450. The data display device 4 can set the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit 450 in accordance with the operation of the store visitor including the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2, and the set volume can be set by the store visitor. It can be changed according to the volume changing operation. The volume change operation is an operation for a customer including a player to change the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit 450 of the data display device 4, and an operation for adjusting the volume of the specific sound ( It can also be said to be a volume adjustment operation.

  In the present embodiment, the data display device 4 is configured to be able to output a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set after the operation from the sound output unit 450 when a volume change operation is performed by a customer. The data display device 4 can set the volume within a predetermined range (a volume changeable range, which will be described later), and when the set volume is at the limit of the predetermined range, the volume is outside the limit of the predetermined range. When the sound volume changing operation is performed so as to change the sound volume, the sound output unit 450 outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume limit within the predetermined range.

  The specific sound is a specific sound that the sound output unit 450 can output. In this embodiment, a store sound such as a confirmation sound (details will be described later) output when the volume of the data display device 4 is changed, an error sound, a warning sound, or a beep sound output when an error occurs in the data display device 4. The sound that excludes the management sound / management sound related to the management and management of the sound, and the data display device as a result of playing the game with the pachinko machine 2, especially the sound for notifying the information related to the game with the pachinko machine 2 The sound output from the fourth sound output unit 450 will be described as a specific sound. The same applies to the gaming devices described in the second and subsequent embodiments.

  Specifically, as will be described later, the specific sound in the present embodiment includes voice, music, and the like output from the sound output unit 450 in accordance with an effect video displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4. , Sound and music that congratulates the big hit in the big hit running production, fanfare sound that congratulates the occurrence of the big hit, and breakthrough notification sound that informs the player that the number of possessed balls has exceeded the specified number included.

  In addition to the above, for example, the game data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 is configured to be output from the sound output unit 450 by sound, and the sound for notifying the player of the game data is specified sound. It may be included. In addition, the sound output unit 450 generates a predetermined voice message or a warning sound as a card forgetting notice to inform the player that the player has forgotten to take a gaming card (member card or visitor card) used for a game on the pachinko machine 2. It is good also as comprising so that it may output and the sound which concerns on this card removal notification is included in a specific sound. In addition, when the customer calls the store clerk by the call operation, a ringing sound for calling the store clerk may be output from the sound output unit 450, and the ringing sound may be included in the specific sound.

  The confirmation sound informs the customer that the volume change (volume adjustment) has been performed at the volume set after the operation when the volume change operation is performed on the data display device 4 by the customer including the player. It is a sound to do. In the present embodiment, as a confirmation sound, a sound such as a sound effect or a voice voice is described as being output for a short time (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds) such that the customer can confirm the volume after the change. In the present embodiment, when the volume set in the data display device 4 is within the limit of the predetermined range, the store visitor performs a volume change operation so as to change the volume outside the limit of the predetermined range. In some cases, the sound output unit 450 outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to a volume limit within a predetermined range.

  The inter-counter counting unit 5 is provided adjacent to the left side (or right side) of each pachinko machine and counts the number of game balls paid out to the lower plate of the pachinko machine 2. At the lowermost position of the inter-counter counting unit 5, a counting payout unit 380, which will be described in detail later, is provided. The counting and payout unit 380 has a function of counting and taking game balls, storing the counted game balls, and paying back a predetermined number of game balls to the player in accordance with a game ball payout operation by the player. Have.

  The hall computer 6 comprehensively manages the game information of each pachinko machine 2 installed in the store, manages the data display device 4 provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, and controls each data display device 4 Settings related to display on the display units (first display unit 430 and second display unit 440) (setting of display contents, display conditions, display mode, etc.) are performed.

  The possession management computer 8 manages the counted number of balls counted by the inter-unit counting unit 5 and manages the number of possessions recorded on the possession card that the player can use for replaying. .

  In this embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to an ordinary pachinko machine 2 which is a kind of gaming machine will be described. However, as will be described later in other embodiments, the gaming machine is an ordinary pachinko machine. It is not limited to 2 and may be a sealed pachinko machine. Also, the gaming machine can be a slot machine.

[1-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of information and signal flows between the devices of the first gaming system 1A. In FIG. 2, illustration of the base terminal 10 is omitted for simplification of description.

  From the pachinko machine 2, signals relating to the game such as a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a short time signal, a driving signal, a winning ball signal, and a start signal are output to the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6.

The jackpot signal is a signal that is output during the jackpot gaming state.
The probability changing signal is a signal that is output during the probability changing state.
The short-time signal is a signal that is output during the short-time state.
The driving signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output every time a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is counted by the out ball counter.
The start signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output when the display result of the special figure variable display unit 28 is derived and displayed.
The prize ball signal is a pulse signal having a predetermined width that is output every time a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is paid out. These signals are examples of game signals output from the gaming machine.

  From the inter-unit counting unit 5, a possessed ball number signal indicating the number of possessed balls counted by the counting payout unit 380 is output to the data display device 4. In this embodiment, the inter-counter counting unit 5 is configured to output a possessed ball number signal to the data display device 4 at intermittent timing. Here, the intermittent timing in the present embodiment is not an arbitrary (real-time) timing, for example, a timing at a predetermined time interval, a timing at which the counting result of the counting payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number, a counting This refers to the timing at which the counting is confirmed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting of the payout unit 380 has been completed and the determination is awaited.

  The inter-counter counting unit 5 outputs the possessed ball number signal at, for example, a timing every predetermined time interval (for example, 10 seconds) or every time the count number of the counting payout unit 380 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 25 balls). The data is output to the data display device 4. The possessed ball number signal is an example of a signal that can specify the number of possessed game media of a player who plays with a gaming machine.

  In addition to this, the inter-counter counting unit 5 includes a card display signal indicating that the ball card has been inserted and a card discharge signal (card insertion / discharge signal) indicating that the ball card has been discharged. 4 is output. Further, from the inter-unit counting unit 5, the possession card information including the number of possessions of the player is output to the possession management computer 8.

  From the hall computer 6, display setting data which is setting data for display on the display unit (the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440) of the data display device 4 and a specific display on the display unit. The display instruction signal is output to the data display device 4.

  Further, the hall computer 6 emits sound from the volume setting data 693 that is a data in which the range of the output volume to be output from the sound output unit 450 of the data display device 4 is set, and the display unit and the light emitting unit of the data display device 4. Light amount setting data 695 which is data in which a light amount range to be set is set is transmitted to the data display device 4.

[1-3. Configuration of pachinko machine]
FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of the external configuration of the pachinko machine 2 and the inter-counter counting unit 5 in the present embodiment.

  The pachinko machine 2 includes a glass door frame 22 formed in a frame shape, and includes a hitting ball supply tray 23 on a lower surface of the glass door frame 22. An operation unit 14 is provided at a predetermined position on the upper surface of the hitting ball supply tray 23, and a lower tray 24 for storing game balls overflowing from the hitting ball supply tray 23 is provided below the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 23; A hitting operation handle (hereinafter referred to as a hitting operation knob) 25 for emitting a hitting ball is provided.

  A game board 26 is detachably attached to the rear side of the glass door frame 22. A game area 27 is provided in front of the game board 26. A special figure variable display unit 28 variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information called “special symbols” is provided in the lower area on the right side toward the game area 27.

  Further, in the central portion of the game area 27, a plurality of types of identification information called “effect symbols” are variably displayed and an effect variable display portion 29 where effect images are displayed, and a plurality of types of “normal symbols”. There is provided a variable display device 30 in which identification information is variably displayed. The game board 26 is provided with a plurality of winning holes 44, a passing gate 31, a starting winning hole 34, and a variable winning ball device 36. An out port 46 for collecting the water is formed.

  When a hitting ball is won in each of these winning openings (that is, the grant condition is established), a winning ball corresponding to each winning opening is paid out by a not-shown ball-cutting / dispensing device and paid by the ball-cutting / dispensing device. A prize ball signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) is output to the outside according to the number of prize balls that have been issued (number of granted balls), so that the number of prize balls is notified to the outside.

  Further, the number of hitting balls won in each winning opening and the number of hitting balls collected in the out slot 46 are counted by an out ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2, and the counted hitting balls are counted. By outputting a driving signal corresponding to the number of balls (one pulse per 10 balls) to the outside, the number of balls to be shot is notified to the outside.

  A hit ball fired by a hammer (not shown) that is swung by the operation of the hitting operation knob 25 enters the game area 27 through the hitting rail, and then flows down the game area 27. At this time, the game balls whose launch momentum is too weak to reach the game area 27 are circulated to the lower plate 24 through the circulation path (not shown).

  In addition, when the ball that has been driven into the game area 27 passes through the passing gate 31, the normal symbol that is stopped and displayed on the variable display device 30 is variably started.

  When the display result after the variable display operation of the variable display device 30 is a predetermined special display result (for example, ◯), the movable piece 35 provided in the start winning opening 34 is opened for a predetermined time, and the starting winning opening is set. 34 is opened (becomes open), and a game ball can be won at the start winning opening 34. That is, after the normal start condition of passing through the passage gate 31 is established, the normal start condition that allows the start of variable symbol display (for example, the variable symbol variable symbol display is not executed and the movable piece 35 is controlled to be opened). When the display of the normal symbol is executed based on the fact that the display of the special symbol has not been established, and a predetermined special display result is derived and displayed as a display result, the game ball can be won at the start winning opening 34. (Starting conditions for variable display of special symbols can be established).

  When a game ball wins at the start winning opening 34, the special symbol variable display unit 28 starts the variable display (variable display) and the effect variable display unit 29 starts the effect display. After that, when the special symbol in the special figure variable display unit 28 is stopped and the stop display result is a predetermined display mode (for example, a big hit symbol), the left in the effect variable display unit 29, The variable display of the middle effect on the right is also stopped. And the display mode of the effect symbol is also set to a predetermined specific display mode (for example, 777), so that a specific game state (big hit game state) is generated and a big hit signal is output. Thus, the occurrence of the jackpot is notified to the outside.

  Further, when the special symbol on the special symbol variable display unit 28 is stopped, a start signal having a predetermined pulse width is output, and the special symbol variable display (variable display) is performed on the special symbol variable display unit 28. Will be notified. That is, after the start condition of winning the game ball to the start winning opening 34 is established, the start condition that allows the variable symbol display to start (for example, the special symbol variable display is not executed and the big hit game The special symbol variable display is executed based on the fact that it is not controlled by the state), and when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a display result, a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. Be controlled.

  When the big win gaming state occurs in this way, the opening / closing plate 40 provided in the variable winning ball device 36 is opened to open the big winning opening (open state), and the game ball wins the big winning opening. Is possible. When a game ball wins a big winning opening, more prize balls are awarded than when a game ball wins another winning opening. Then, after the opening / closing plate 40 provided in the variable winning ball apparatus 36 is opened and the large winning opening is opened (after being opened), the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or the predetermined number of game balls When the earlier one of (for example, ten) winning conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing plate 40 is closed and the big winning opening is closed (closed state), and it is impossible to win a game ball in the big winning opening. It becomes.

  When a hit ball that has entered the large winning opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 36 in the open state wins a specific winning area (V pocket) and is detected by a V count switch (not shown), the open state at that time. Repeated continuation control is performed in which the control is changed from the closed state to the open state after waiting for the end of. The upper limit number of the repeated continuation control is set to 15 times, for example.

  It should be noted that the variable winning ball apparatus 36 not provided with the specific winning area (V pocket) is changed from the closed state (the state where the large winning opening is closed) to the open state (the large winning opening) for a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). It is also possible to execute repeated continuation control in which the control is performed in a state where is open. This open state ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins, whichever comes first. The number of executions of the repeated continuation control for controlling the variable winning ball device 36 from the closed state to the open state is set differently depending on, for example, the types of a plurality of specific game states (big hit game states). In some cases, the number of executions of the continuous control is called 15 big hits, and the number of executions of the repeated continuous control is called 2 big hits. In other words, in the big hit gaming state, the repeated continuation control is executed a number of times according to the type of the big hit gaming state, so that a game ball can be won in the big winning opening, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a period.

  Even when a hitting ball is won in this big winning opening (that is, a grant condition is established), a winning ball corresponding to the winning is paid out by a not-shown ball-cutting device, and is paid out by the ball-cutting device. A prize ball signal (1 pulse per 10 balls) is output to the outside according to the number of awarded balls (grant number), and the number of prize balls is notified to the outside.

  When the display result of the special figure variable display part and the display result of the effect variable display part are stopped and displayed in a combination of predetermined jackpot symbols, the big hit gaming state occurs as described above. A reach state may occur in a state before being stopped and displayed.

  When the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol variable display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29 and the production symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined probability variation symbol type, After the completion of the “hit game state”, the probability of a big hit again becomes a probability fluctuation state in which the probability state becomes higher than the normal game state (low probability state). It is called “probability change big hit” in distinction from big hit, and during the probability fluctuation state after the end of probability change big hit, the occurrence of the probability change state is notified to the outside by setting the signal during probability change to the output state.

  In other words, in the probability variation state, since the rate of control to the big hit gaming state is higher than that in the normal gaming state, the advantageous period is advantageous for the player. For example, the period from the end of the jackpot gaming state related to the promising jackpot to the control of the jackpot gaming state related to the next jackpot is controlled to the probability fluctuation state. A variable display that does not result in a specific display of a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) is executed after the big hit gaming state related to the probable big hit and before being controlled to the big hit gaming state related to the next big hit. Based on this, the probability variation state may be terminated (a so-called ST machine may be used).

  When the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol variable display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29 and the production symbol are stopped and displayed with a combination of symbols other than the predetermined probability variation symbols, ”Until the variable display reaches the predetermined number of times in the special figure variable display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29 or until the next big hit occurs, the special symbol and the production in the special figure variable display unit 28. The variable display time (variable time) of the effect symbol in the variable display unit 29 is shorter than the normal gaming state (non-time-short state) (the special symbol time-short control is executed), and the time-short state is set. In the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is set to the output state, so that the occurrence of the time reduction state is notified to the outside.

  When the special symbol time-short control is executed, the start condition is easily established, and the frequency of the special symbol variable display is increased and the game is easily controlled to the big hit gaming state. Become. Further, in the time reduction state, the normal symbol time reduction control in which the normal symbol variable display time (variation time) is shorter than the normal gaming state (non-time reduction state) may be executed. When the normal symbol time-short control is executed, the normal start condition is easily established, and the frequency with which the normal symbol is variably displayed is increased (the frequency with which the special display result is derived and displayed is increased), and the movable piece 35 is opened. Since the frequency of control becomes high, it becomes an advantageous period advantageous for the player. Further, the normal symbol probability changing control may be executed in which the ratio of the normal symbol display result to the special display result in the time-short state is higher than that in the normal game state (non-time-short state).

  When the normal symbol probability changing control is executed, the frequency with which the special display result is derived and displayed increases, and the frequency with which the movable piece 35 is controlled to open is increased, which is an advantageous period advantageous to the player. Further, in the time saving state, the opening extension control for extending the period during which the movable piece 35 is controlled to open or increasing the number of times of opening may be performed. When the opening extension control is executed, the winning frequency at the start winning opening 34 is increased, and this is an advantageous period advantageous to the player. In the short time state, one or more of the special symbol short time control, normal symbol short time control, normal symbol probability changing control, and open / extended control may be executed.

  The short-time state is, for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the end of the big hit gaming state related to the normal big hit (a big hit that is not a probable big hit) and before being controlled to the big hit gaming state related to the next big hit. ) Is ended based on the execution of variable display that does not result in a specific display result. In this embodiment, the probability variation state is accompanied by a time-short state except when controlled to the latent probability variation state described later. As described above, in this embodiment, it is assumed that the period controlled to at least one of the big hit gaming state, the probability variation state, and the short time state is an advantageous period.

  The pachinko machine 2 of the present embodiment is equipped with an information output board (not shown) for outputting these signals to the outside, and the information output board, the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6 are not shown. Connected via a signal cable, an external output signal consisting of a big hit signal, a probability changing signal, a time reduction signal, a start signal, and a prize ball signal is output from the information output board via the signal cable. And output to the hall computer 6. In addition to these signals, out balls are counted by an unillustrated out ball counter, and each time the counted value of the out balls reaches a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls), driving with a predetermined pulse width is performed. A signal is output from the out ball counter to the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6.

  The big hit medium signal is a signal indicating that a big hit has occurred and also a signal indicating that the big hit game state is being controlled. During the period in which the jackpot gaming state is controlled, control is performed so that the jackpot signal is in an ON state, and during the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled, the jackpot signal is in an OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to specify that a big hit has occurred in the gaming device connected to the pachinko machine 2, such as the data display device 4 or the hall computer 6, and that the big hit gaming state is controlled.

  The probability changing signal is a signal indicating that the probability that the big hit occurs is controlled to the probability changing state (high probability state) in which the ratio is higher than the normal state (low probability state). During the period in which the probability variation state is controlled, control is performed so that the probability variation signal is in the ON state, and during the period when the probability variation state is not controlled, the probability variation signal is in the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to specify that the game device connected to the pachinko machine 2 such as the data display device 4 or the hall computer 6 is controlled to be in a probable variation state. In addition, when the game state is controlled to the probable change state with the end of the big hit game state, it is possible to identify with these gaming devices that the probable big hit has occurred. In addition, when the jackpot gaming state is not controlled to be in the probable change state, it is possible to specify that a big jackpot has been generated by these gaming devices. As a result, the number of occurrences of jackpots and the breakdown of probability variation jackpots and normal jackpots can be tabulated on the gaming device side.

  The short time signal is a signal indicating that the short time state is controlled to shorten the variable display time of the variable display device. During the period controlled to the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is turned on, and during the period not controlled to the time reduction state, the time reduction signal is turned off. Thereby, it is possible to specify that the game device connected to the pachinko machine 2 such as the data display device 4 and the hall computer 6 is controlled in the time-saving state.

  In addition, when the probability change state is controlled with the end of the big hit gaming state but is not controlled in the short time state, it is possible to specify that the latent probability change big hit has occurred with these gaming devices. Here, the latent probability variation jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a probability variation state (high probability state) after the end of the big hit gaming state, in which the opening pattern of the big winning opening is a common big hit with the small hit. Note that the small win is a control mode in which the game state does not change after the completion of the opening control of the big winning opening although the big winning opening is opened in a specific opening pattern (for example, 0.5 seconds is opened twice). Say. Therefore, it is difficult for a player to specify whether a small hit or a latent probability change big hit has occurred if the big winning opening is opened with a specific opening pattern. On the other hand, in the gaming apparatus connected to the pachinko machine 2, it is possible to identify the latent probability changing state that is difficult for the player to grasp based on the fact that the player is not in the short-time state despite being in the probability changing state.

  The pachinko machine 2 of the present embodiment has a control for counting and paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on a prize ball signal output based on a prize from a game control board that controls the game in the pachinko machine 2. And a prize ball control board (not shown) for performing control for counting and lending out 125 game balls as a payout unit based on the number of possessed balls counted by the inter-unit counting unit 5 Thus, it is possible to rent game balls that are multiples of 125 balls, which is the payout unit.

  The pachinko machine exemplified in the present embodiment has variable display means (for example, special figure variable) for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) that can identify each. The display unit 28 and the production variable display unit 29) are provided, and when a predetermined display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the variable display means, the specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player is obtained. It is an example of the gaming machine that controls and controls the gaming state to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display means becomes the specific display result is higher than that in the normal state or the normal state after the specific gaming state ends.

In addition, the pachinko machine exemplified in the present embodiment is a variable display device (for example, a special display) that displays and displays a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols and effect symbols) that can be identified. When the display result of the variable display of the identification information in the figure variable display section 28 and the effect variable display section 29) becomes a predetermined specific display result, the first game state (open state) and game advantageous to the player The variable winning means (special variable winning ball device for switching the big prize opening to the open state or the closed state) that can be changed to any state of the second gaming state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player is changed to the first state. A gaming machine,
First gaming state control means for controlling to a first gaming state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state for a predetermined period of time a predetermined number of times (for example, a big hit gaming state in which a maximum of 30 seconds is released 15 times);
A second game state in which the variable winning means is changed to the first state at least one of a period shorter than the predetermined period and a number less than the predetermined number of times (for example, a big hit game in which a maximum of 0.5 seconds is released twice) The game state is controlled to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result is improved as compared with the normal state after executing the state (the big hit gaming state associated with the latent probability change big hit). Gaming state control means;
After executing a third gaming state (for example, a small hit gaming state in which a maximum of 0.5 seconds is released twice) in which the variable winning means is changed in the same manner as the second gaming state, the variable winning means is changed to the first gaming state. A third gaming state control means for controlling the gaming state before the state is changed;
Deciding whether to control to the first gaming state, whether to control to the second gaming state, and whether to control to the third gaming state before deriving and displaying the display result of the variable display Pre-determining means to
It is an example of a gaming machine provided with effect state control means for controlling to a specific effect state that is the same effect mode after being controlled to the second game state and after being controlled to the third game state.

  In such a gaming machine, when the latent probability change big hit occurs and when the small hit occurs, the opening pattern of the big prize opening is common and the production mode is also common, so the player has a latent probability change big hit. It is difficult to grasp whether it has occurred or a small hit has occurred.

In addition, the pachinko machine exemplified in this embodiment is
A player plays a game by launching a game medium into the game area,
A variable winning device (movable piece 35) that is provided in the gaming area and can be changed between an unfavorable state (closed state) in which the game medium is difficult or difficult to win, and an advantageous state (open state) in which the game medium is easy to win. (So-called electric tulips))
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the normal start area (passage gate 31) provided in the game area, a plurality of types of normal identification information (ordinary symbols) that can be distinguished from each other are variably displayed. Normal identification information variable display control means for performing control for deriving and displaying the display result on the normal identification information variable display device (variable display device 30);
A variable for performing control to change the variable winning device to an advantageous state based on the display result derived and displayed on the normal identification information variable display device becoming a predetermined display result (lighting state of LED indicating winning). Winning device control means;
Based on the fact that a predetermined condition (for example, the end of a big hit gaming state of a big hit type with a high base state (for example, a big hit type other than the latent probability variation big hit)) is established, the ratio of the variable winning device to be in an advantageous state is low It is an example of a gaming machine provided with a high base state control means for controlling from a base state (normal state: low base state) to a high base state with a high ratio of making the variable winning device advantageous.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when a latent probability change big hit occurs in a low base state, a high probability low base state occurs after the big hit gaming state ends, and when a small hit occurs, the low hit state after the small hit gaming state ends. Since the player is in the low probability base state, if the player is controlled to the low base state after the completion of the opening control of the big prize opening, whether the latent probability change big hit has occurred (whether the player is controlled to the high probability low base state) or It is difficult to grasp whether a small hit has occurred (whether it is controlled to a low probability low base state).

  Note that the output paths of the symbol determination signal, the big hit signal, the short time medium signal, and the probability changing signal are not limited to those shown in the present embodiment. Any of these signals may be output from the main control board. For example, variable display means (for example, a special symbol display) is connected to the main control board for deriving and displaying a display result after starting variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (for example, special symbols) that can be identified. When a specific display result (big hit symbol) predetermined on the variable display means is derived and displayed, control is performed to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player. Then, after the end of the specific gaming state, the gaming state is controlled to a high probability state in which the probability that the display result of the variable display means becomes the specific display result is higher than that in the normal state or the normal state. The main control board outputs a symbol determination signal every time variable display is executed by the variable display means, and outputs a big hit signal when controlled to a specific gaming state, and is controlled to a high probability state. If it is, the signal during probability change is output, and if it is controlled to the high base state, the signal during time reduction is output.

  In such a gaming machine, for example, when a latent probability change big hit occurs in a low probability low base state, the signal during probability change is displayed after the big hit gaming state ends (after the big winning opening is opened twice for a maximum of 0.5 seconds). ON, the short / medium signal is OFF, and if a small hit occurs in the same low probability low base state, it is definitely changing after the small hit gaming state is over (after the big winning opening is opened twice in a maximum of 0.5 seconds) The signal is OFF, and the hour / medium signal is OFF. Therefore, in an external device such as a data display device to which a signal is input, it is possible to determine whether or not the latent probability changing state (probability changing signal ON, time reduction medium signal OFF) is based on the probability changing signal and the time reduction medium signal. ing.

  Note that the pachinko machine 2 in the present embodiment may be an encapsulated ball pachinko machine (hereinafter referred to as an “enclosed pachinko machine”) 2B, which will be described later, instead of the normal pachinko machine 2. In the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, a game ball is enclosed inside, and when the player operates the hitting operation handle, the firing motor of the launching device is driven to drive the enclosed ball into the game area one by one. It is configured as follows. A game ball that has been driven into the game area wins at any of the winning openings or is collected at the out opening without winning. The game balls won in any one of the winning openings and the game balls collected in the out openings are returned again to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path in the gaming machine. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle, the game ball at the hitting position is again driven into the game area.

  Although details will be described later, in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the player plays a game by holding points. Specifically, every time a shot ball is detected by the shot ball detector provided in the launch device, the score is subtracted, and every time a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detector, the score is added. So, update your score from time to time. In addition, when a game ball wins a winning opening, the score is updated as needed by adding a score corresponding to the winning to the winning opening.

  When the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B is applied to the present embodiment, the player's points may be handled as the number of possessed game media and the possessed ball special display described later may be performed. Specifically, thresholds for the player's current points (first display threshold, first non-display threshold, second display threshold, and second non-display threshold) are determined, and threshold determination for the player's points is determined. And the predetermined image may be displayed / hidden on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4. The possessed ball special display will be described later in detail.

[1-4. Configuration of inter-unit counting unit]
FIG. 3 is a front view illustrating an example of an external configuration of the inter-counter counting unit 5, and FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the inter-unit counting unit 5.
As shown in FIG. 3, an operation button 550 including a ticket issuing button 551 and a payout button 552 and a card insertion slot 560 for a player to insert / remove a ball card are provided on the front face of the inter-unit counting unit 5. It has been.

  When the player presses the ticketing button 551, a gaming card in which the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) of the player at that time is recorded is issued from the card insertion slot 560. In addition, when the player presses the payout button 552, a predetermined number of unit balls among the number of possessed balls is paid back to the pachinko machine 2, and the player can play a game using the paid game balls. . In the present embodiment, the number of unit balls to be paid back to the player in one payout operation will be described as “125 shots”.

  Here, “mochidama” is a ball acquired by the player on the day, and is converted into a game ball by paying out the ball. The number of possessed balls is the number of balls that have been recorded on the card as a result of the player playing the game with the pachinko machine 2 and have not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is. In general, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochitama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired the day before the previous day, Say. The “game ball” is a ball that can be fired by the pachinko machine 2 and is generated in exchange for withdrawing the remaining amount of the prepaid card, a holding ball, or a stored ball.

  Note that the difference between `` Samatama '' and `` Mochitama '' is the number of balls that have been deposited into the amusement hall after performing a storage operation to deposit at the amusement hall, or the number of balls that have not yet been deposited at the amusement hall Therefore, “mochitama” may be managed by the possession management computer 8.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the card insertion slot 560 is connected to a ball card reader / writer (R / W) 570 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 560. The record information of the card ID and the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) recorded on the possessed card inserted from the card insertion slot 560 is read and written.

  Further, a control unit 500 for controlling the operation of the inter-counter counting unit 5 is provided at a substantially central position of the inter-unit counting unit 5 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the inter-unit counting unit 5. Various operations of the inter-unit counting unit 5 are controlled by the control unit 500.

  Further, at the lowest position of the inter-unit counting unit 5, the game balls are counted and taken in, and the counted game balls are the maximum fraction, that is, less than 125 units which are payout units in the corresponding pachinko machine 2. A counting payout unit 380 is provided that stores only 124, which is the maximum value of fractions, and counts game balls with fractions less than the unit. Hereinafter, “fraction less than unit” is referred to as “fraction”.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the counting and paying unit 380 is connected to a horizontally long box-like connecting box 340 disposed between the lower plate 24 of the pachinko machine 2 and the repair board of the game island. It has become.

  The connection box 340 is formed on the terminal side of the connection box 340 and has a relatively large height box (not shown) in the height direction, and a relatively small thickness in the height direction. It is comprised from the path | route box (not shown) formed so that a connection part may be connected.

  The connection box 340 is connected to the counting / dispensing unit 380 so that the terminal box is positioned below the lower plate 24. A game ball discharged from the lower plate 24 is placed on the upper surface of the terminal box. A feeding portion 345 having a hopper shape is formed. Also, at the lower front position of the terminal box, there is an open / close shutter that can be opened and closed by the player and is normally energized so as to be closed, and the fraction paid back (returned) from the counting payout unit 380 A return port 342 through which the game balls are discharged is provided.

  Further, two channels are provided at an upper position in the path box so as to incline toward the counting payout unit 380, and guide the game balls thrown into the throwing portion 345 to the counting payout unit 380 under natural flow. A counting passage 343 is provided. Further, a return passage 344 is provided below the counting passage 343 so as to be inclined toward the return opening 342 and guides the game balls paid out from the counting payout unit 380 to the return opening 342 in a natural flow. .

  A counting lever 341 is provided at the upper front position of the terminal box 340a. The counting lever 341 is slidable by the player. By sliding the counting lever 341 against the biasing force, the insertion portion 345 is provided. The opening / closing shutter 346 provided at the entrance to the counting passage 343 is opened.

  The count dispensing unit 380 to which the connection box 340 is connected is connected to the counting passage 343 and is provided so as to incline from the front side of the inter-unit counting unit 5 toward the inner side of the inter-unit counting unit 5. A counting sensor (not shown) for detecting and counting game balls flowing down the inflow path is provided for each flow path at the end position of the inflow path. A game ball that has flowed into the count payout unit 380 through the passage 343 is detected and counted by the count sensor. When counted by the counting sensor, a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting payout unit 380 to the control unit 500 in response to detection of one game ball. Each time the detection signal is input, the control unit 500 adds 1 to the stored number of possessed balls.

  When the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 flow into the counting passage 343 from the lower plate 24 at any time by keeping the counting lever 341 pulled by the player. In addition, when the player counts up as needed by counting by the counting payout unit 380, the player keeps the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341, and keeps the game balls to some extent. There are two cases where the accumulated game balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke by pulling the counting lever 341 at the stage where the balls have accumulated, and increase at a stroke by being counted by the counting payout unit 380.

  Further, when the number of balls possessed by the player decreases, the game ball is paid back to the player by the player's refund operation, and as described above, the number of refunds by one refund operation is 125. The number of possessed balls decreases by 125 by one refund operation. The control unit 500 updates the possessed ball count data 497 by subtracting 125 from the stored possessed ball count every time a refund operation is performed. However, if a refund operation is performed when the number of possessed balls is less than 125, the number of possessed balls is set to zero. That is, the number of balls corresponding to the stored number of possessed balls is subtracted.

  Further, the inter-counter counting unit 5 and the pachinko machine 2 are configured to be able to send and receive lending-related signals accompanying lending of a plurality of game balls predetermined as payout units. The lending-related signal includes a lending request signal for causing the pachinko machine 2 to lend gaming balls from the inter-counter counting unit 5, a terminal terminal lending completion signal output from the pachinko machine 2, a stand READY signal, and an inter-counter count. Signals such as a unit READY signal and a terminal terminal lending request completion confirmation signal are included. In addition, from the pachinko machine 2, game signals such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a short-time signal, a winning ball signal, a start signal, and a driving ball counter (not shown) provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 It is comprised so that reception can be received.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the inter-unit counting unit 5 includes a control unit 500, an operation button 550, a ball card insertion / ejection unit 565, a ball card R / W 570, a count payout unit 380, A communication unit 570 and a second communication unit 580 are provided.

  The control unit 500 includes a processing unit 510 that is a type of a control device and an arithmetic unit that includes a processor such as a CPU and a DSP and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC, a ROM 520 that is a type of a nonvolatile storage device, It has a RAM 530 which is a kind of volatile storage device capable of storing card information 533 such as the number of possessed balls recorded on the currently receiving card, and an RTC which can output time information, calendar information, etc. And a clock unit 540 configured. The RAM 530 is backed up by a battery (not shown) and retains data stored for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off.

  The ROM 520 stores an inter-counter counting unit processing program 521 that is read by the processing unit 510 and executed as inter-unit counting unit processing. The inter-counter counting unit process will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  In the RAM 530, the possessed ball number data 531 indicating the number of the game balls possessed by the player (the number of possessed balls), the card ID (member card ID or visitor card ID) recorded on the received game card, Card information 533 including information such as the number of balls possessed by the player (the number of possessions) and the prepaid balance is stored.

  The first communication unit 570 is a communication device for sending and receiving data and sending and receiving signals to and from the data display device 4, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. . The first communication unit 570 transmits a possessed ball number signal indicating the possessed ball of the player to the data display device 4 under the control of the processing unit 510. In addition, the first communication unit 570 transmits a card insertion / discharge signal to the data display device 4 under the control of the processing unit 510 when the player performs an operation of inserting or ejecting a ball card.

  The second communication unit 580 is a communication device for sending and receiving data and sending and receiving signals to and from the possession management computer 8, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. The The second communication unit 580 transmits the ball card information including the number of balls of the player to the ball management computer 8 according to the control of the processing unit 510.

[1-5. Functional configuration of hall computer]
FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the hall computer 6.
The hall computer 6 includes a processing unit 610, an input unit 620, a display unit 625, a sound output unit 630, a clock unit 635, a first communication unit 640, a second communication unit 650, a ROM 670, and a hard disk 680. And a RAM 690, each of which is a computer system connected via a bus.

  The processing unit 610 is configured to include a processor such as a CPU or DSP that integrally controls each unit of the hall computer 6 or an integrated circuit such as an ASIC according to various programs such as a system program stored in the ROM 670. Device and arithmetic unit. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 610 includes a display setting unit 611, a game totaling unit 613, a volume setting unit 615, and a light amount setting unit 617 as main functional units.

  The input unit 620 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 610. By an operation input from the input unit 620, an instruction operation such as editing of data in various databases stored in the hard disk 680 is performed.

  The display unit 625 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 610, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 625 displays data contents of various databases stored in the hard disk 680.

  The sound output unit 630 is a sound output device such as a speaker that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 610. From the sound output unit 630, for example, a warning sound or the like for notifying an administrator of a warning or the like when a warning is issued or an abnormality occurs is output.

  The clock unit 635 is an internal clock included in the hall computer 6 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The clocking time (including date) of the clock unit 635 is output to the processing unit 610.

  The first communication unit 640 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 2, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The first communication unit 640 receives from the pachinko machine 2 game signals such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a time-shortage signal, a driving signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal. In addition to these game signals, a safe signal indicating the number of safe balls or an out ball signal indicating the number of out balls may be received.

  The second communication unit 650 is a communication device for performing communication with the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. In accordance with the control of the processing unit 610, the second communication unit 650 displays the display data on the data display device 4 such as display setting data 691, volume setting data 693, and light amount setting data 695, setting data related to light emission, A display instruction signal including a simultaneous effect display instruction signal for instructing the data display device 4 to display a simultaneous effect is transmitted to the data display device 4.

  The ROM 670 is a read-only nonvolatile storage device, and stores various programs such as a system program for the hall computer 6. In the present embodiment, the ROM 670 stores a management program 671 that is read by the processing unit 610 and executed as management processing. The management program 671 includes a display setting program 671a executed as a main process, a volume setting program 671b executed as a volume setting process, and a light quantity setting program 671c executed as a light quantity setting process as subroutines. These processes will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  The hall computer 61A may be configured not to include the ROM 670 as a storage device. In this case, the various programs described above may be stored in, for example, the hard disk 680.

  The hard disk 680 is a readable / writable nonvolatile storage device, and stores various data related to display settings of the data display device 4 and various databases related to games in the pachinko machine 2. Specifically, a display content setting table 681, a simultaneous effect display setting table 682, a display mode setting table 683, a volume setting table 684, a light amount setting table 685, and a game totaling database 688, Sales management database 689 is stored.

  The display content setting table 681 is a table related to the setting of the display content of the data display device 4, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. The display content setting table 681 stores a pachinko machine ID, a model name, a display type, and a display content in association with each other.

The pachinko machine ID is a number (ID) for uniquely identifying each pachinko machine 2 and is assigned to each pachinko machine 2 individually.
The model name is the model name of the pachinko machine 2 with the pachinko machine ID.
The display type is a display type of the data display device 4, and in this embodiment, two types of “normal” and “simultaneous effect” are defined.
The display content is the display content to be displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4, and the display content of the first display unit 430 and the display content of the second display unit 440 are individually determined.

  Specifically, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 having the pachinko machine IDs P1 to P20 is “pachinko XXX”. The display contents of the first display unit 430 in the normal state include (1) pachinko machine model name, (2) start count, (3) big hit count, (4) probability variation big hit count, (5) normal big hit count, ( 6) The number of hits on the previous day, (7) Number of hits on the previous day, (8) Special possession ball display, and (9) Version information are defined.

  (8) The possessed ball special display is a special display for displaying a possessed ball of a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 using a predetermined image. This possessed ball special display is a possessed ball image display that represents the player's possessed ball using an image (predetermined possessed ball image display, possessed ball special image display), a simple possessed ball display that simply represents the player's possessed ball In other words. In the present embodiment, the case where the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 performs the possessed ball special display will be described as an example.

  Further, the display contents of the first display unit 430 at the time of simultaneous production are defined as (1) jackpot running production, (2) pachinko machine special video, and (3) special character video.

  (1) The big hit running effect is the first of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model when the big hit pachinko machine 2 exists in the same type of pachinko machines 2. This is an effect of displaying a special video celebrating the big hit on the display unit 430. The running effect is realized by displaying a big hit video with a certain time difference on the data display device 4 from end to end of the game island. In this case, sound or music related to the big hit video is output from the sound output unit 450 as a specific sound.

  Unlike the big hit running effect, in the individual data display device 4, when a big hit occurs in the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4, a fanfare sound congratulating the big hit is displayed in the data display. The sound output unit 450 of the device 4 may output the specific sound.

  In addition, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases with 1000 hits, 2000 shots, 3000 shots, etc. with the occurrence of a big hit, 1000 hits, 2000 hits, 3000 hits, etc. A breakthrough display of the number of possessed balls may be displayed on the first display unit 430, or a breakthrough notification sound of the number of possessed balls may be output from the sound output unit 450 as a specific sound. In addition, the number of possessed balls for which breakthrough notification is performed may be 1000 shot units, 5000 shot units, or 10,000 shot units.

  (2) The special video of the pachinko machine is a promotional video of the pachinko machine 2 of the model, and is displayed simultaneously on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. Let

  (3) The special character image is an image of a hidden character or a mascot character of the pachinko machine 2 of the model, and the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to all the pachinko machines 2 of the same model. To display the effect simultaneously.

  Further, the display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state are defined as (1) vacancy information, (2) jackpot information, (3) latency probability change information, and (4) time reduction information.

(1) The vacant table information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently vacant.
Whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is empty can be determined by an operation determination process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 described later.

  In the operation determination process, for example, when no game signal is received from the pachinko machine 2 for a certain period of time (for example, when no out signal or safe signal is received), the pachinko machine 2 is not in an operating state (non-operating state). ) And can be determined to be empty.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 is provided with the inter-counter counting unit 5, so the card insertion / discharge signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5, the number of possessed balls recorded on the game card, etc. It is also possible to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is empty by performing an operation determination process based on the information. Further, the signal from the pachinko machine 2 and the signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 are used in combination, and an operation determination process is performed based on these signals to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is an empty base. You may do it. In this case, it is possible to more reliably perform the operation determination and the empty table determination.

  Unlike the present embodiment, the card unit 3 described in the second embodiment is also provided as a recording medium processing apparatus that accepts a membership card or a visitor card and processes card information corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. Embodiments are also conceivable. In this case, whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is in operation based on information such as a card insertion / discharge signal from the card unit 3 and a prepaid balance, the number of balls, etc. recorded on the game card ( It is also possible to determine whether or not it is an empty board. Further, the signal from the pachinko machine 2 and the signal from the card unit 3 may be used together to determine whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is in an operating state (whether it is an empty board). . Also in this case, the operation determination and the vacant stand determination can be performed more reliably.

  Further, even if the game signal is not received from the pachinko machine 2 for a certain time or more, the player may have left the seat for reasons such as a rest room rest after securing the seat. Therefore, for the pachinko machine 2 on which the player is not seated, the store clerk may look around and check whether the stand is in operation (whether it is a vacant stand). If it is determined that the vacant table is available, the store clerk may set the data display device 4 to display the vacant table using the setting remote controller at hand.

  (2) The jackpot information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is hitting the jackpot. While the jackpot signal is being received from the pachinko machine 2, it can be determined that the pachinko machine 2 is jackpot.

  (3) The latent probability changing information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in the latent probability changing state. During the latent probability change, since the probability change state is latent and the lottery is performed with a probability change probability, the player is likely to win a big hit by continuing the game as it is.

  (4) Time reduction information is information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in a time reduction state. During the short time, the player can rotate in the electric support (support by electric tulip) state for a predetermined number of rotations (for example, 30 rotations), but since the lottery is performed with a normal probability, Same as normal.

  In addition, (1) store advertisement information, (2) new stand replacement information, and (3) store event information are defined as display contents of the second display unit 440 during simultaneous production.

  (1) Store advertisement information is information indicating the business hours of the store, the model name of the installed pachinko machine 2, the service content, and the like.

  (2) New machine replacement information is information indicating the pachinko machine 2 introduced as a new machine and information for notifying the date and time of the next new machine replacement.

  (3) Store event information is information relating to an event performed at the store. For example, information such as Ladies' Day or Silver Day is included.

  Similarly, the pachinko machine 2 with the pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40 has the model name “Pachinko YYY”. In addition to the information (1) to (9) in “Pachinko XXX”, (10) the number of initial hits is determined as the display content of the first display unit 430 at the normal time.

  In addition, for the pachinko machine 2 with pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40, the display contents of the first display unit 430 at the time of simultaneous production are (1) big hit running effect, (2) pachinko machine special video, (3) special character video In addition to (4), live video is defined.

  In addition, for the pachinko machines 2 with the pachinko machine IDs P21 to P40, the display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state include (1) vacant table information, (2) big hit information, (3) small hit information, (4 ) Information on suddenness (abrupt change) is defined.

  That is, in this embodiment, the display contents to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 according to the model of the pachinko machine 2 are displayed on the hall computer 6. It can be set freely on the side.

  In the display content setting table 681, game information based on information output from the pachinko machine 2 is determined as display content of the second display unit 440. Specifically, (1) vacant stand information, (2) jackpot information, (3) latent probability change information, and (4) time reduction information defined as display contents of the second display unit 440 in the normal state are the pachinko machine 2 It is information that can be specified based on the game signal output from. Therefore, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 6 can set the game information based on the information output from the pachinko machine 2 as the display content of the second display unit 440.

  Thereby, it is possible to make the game information visible to a player other than the player. For example, when the game information is the identification of the latent probability change state, the player is informed that the latent probability change is in progress to a player other than the player without knowing that the latent probability change is in progress. It becomes possible.

  Further, in the display content setting table 681, less information than information displayed on the first display unit 430 is determined as information displayed on the second display unit 440. Thereby, the display content setting unit of the hall computer 6 sets the display content so that less information than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 is displayed on the second display unit 440. According to this, information other than the player can be visually recognized with an appropriate amount of information. Since the information displayed on the second display unit 440 is for players other than the player, the information may be less than the information displayed on the first display unit 430 that the player confirms during the game. When a player looks around the entire amusement island, it is considered that there are many cases where it does not usually look so fine.

  In the display content setting table 681, display contents to be displayed on the display unit (the first display unit 430, the second display unit 440) of the data display device 4 are defined. By creating display setting data 691 using this display content setting table 681, the display content of the display unit of the data display device 4 is set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has display content setting means for setting the display content of the data display device 4.

  The simultaneous effect display setting table 682 is a table related to the display setting of the data display device 4 at the time of the simultaneous effect, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG. In the simultaneous effect display setting table 682, a model name, a simultaneous effect type, a simultaneous effect display condition, and simultaneous effect video data 493 are defined in association with each other.

The simultaneous effect type is various display contents defined in the display type “simultaneous effect” in the display content setting table 681.
The simultaneous effect display condition is a condition for causing the first display unit 430 to display the simultaneous effect.
The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 when the simultaneous effect display condition is satisfied.

  For example, for the model name “Pachinko XXX”, “Big hit running production”, “Pachinko machine special video”, and “Special character video” are defined as simultaneous production types. The simultaneous performance display condition of the “big hit running effect” is “there is a big hit pachinko machine among the same type of pachinko machines”. In this case, the simultaneous production video displayed on the first display unit 430 is “Movie_XXX1”. It is.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “pachinko machine special image” is “every time the first specified time has elapsed”, and in this case, the simultaneous effect image displayed on the first display unit 430 is “Movie_XXX2”. The first specified time can be set as appropriate, for example, 3 hours.

  The simultaneous effect display condition of the “special character image” is “every second specified time has elapsed”, and the simultaneous effect image displayed on the first display unit 430 in this case is “Movie_XXX3”. The second specified time can be set as appropriate, for example, 2 hours.

  As for the model name “Pachinko YYY”, as shown in the drawing, data relating to a plurality of simultaneous performances is defined.

  In the simultaneous effect display setting table 682, display conditions are determined in addition to the display contents of the display unit of the data display device 4, and the processing unit 610 uses the simultaneous effect display setting table 682. By creating the display setting data 691, the display contents and display conditions of the data display device 4 are set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has display condition setting means for setting the display conditions of the data display device 4 in addition to the display content setting means.

  The display mode setting table 683 is a table that defines display patterns of information to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, and includes a first display unit display mode setting table 683a, This includes the second display unit display mode setting table 683b.

  FIG. 8 is an example of a table configuration of the first display unit display mode setting table 683a, and the display type, the display pattern, and the display mode of the first display unit 430 are defined in association with each other. As described above, two types of display, “normal” and “simultaneous production”, are defined as display types.

  “Pattern A, Pattern B, Pattern C, Pattern D,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “Normal”. For example, in “pattern A”, the display mode of the first display unit 430 is “model name” in the first display window, “start count” in the second display window,. It is stipulated that “the number of hits per day” and “the possessed ball special display” are displayed in the eighth display window. Similarly, for example, in “pattern C”, “model name” in the first display window, “start count” in the second display window,..., “Probability hit count” in the seventh display window, eighth display window It is stipulated that “owned ball special display” is displayed on the screen.

  “Pattern a, pattern b, pattern c, pattern d,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “simultaneous effect”. Specifically, as the display mode of the first display unit 430, “full-screen big hit running video” is displayed for “pattern a”, “pachinko machine promotional video for full screen”, “pattern c” for “pattern b”. “Full screen special character video” and “Pattern d” display “live video”.

  FIG. 9 shows an example of the table configuration of the second display unit display mode setting table 683b. Similar to the first display unit display mode setting table 683a, the display type, display pattern, and second display unit 440 are displayed. The display mode is determined in association with it. As described above, two types of display, “normal” and “simultaneous production”, are defined.

  “Pattern P, pattern Q, pattern R, pattern S,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “normal”. As the display mode of the second display unit 440, “full screen vacancy information” is displayed for “pattern P”, “full screen big hit information” is displayed for “pattern Q”, and “full screen latency probability change” is displayed for “pattern R”. “Information” and “Pattern S” are respectively determined to display “full-screen time information”.

  “Pattern p, pattern q, pattern r,...” Is defined as the display pattern of the display type “simultaneous effect”. As the display mode of the second display unit 440, “full screen store advertising information” is displayed for “pattern p”, “full screen new stand replacement information” is displayed for “pattern q”, and “full screen store information” is displayed for “pattern r”. It is determined that “event information” is displayed.

  In the display mode setting table 683, it is determined what display target data is displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4, and the processing unit 610 uses the display mode setting table 683. By creating the display setting data 691, the display mode of the data display device 4 is set. Therefore, the hall computer 6 has a display mode setting unit for setting the display mode of the data display device 4 in addition to the display content setting unit and the display condition setting unit.

The volume setting table 684 is a table used to set the volume of sound output from the sound output unit 450 of the data display device 4, and an example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the volume setting table, the setting number, the volume changeable range, and the detailed volume setting content are stored in association with each other.

The setting No. is a number for uniquely identifying the setting of the volume range, and “V1”, “V2”, “V3”,.
The volume changeable range is a range in which the player can change the volume in the setting No., and a numerical range corresponding to the volume is determined. The volume changeable range corresponds to a predetermined range.
As the detailed sound volume setting content, a specific sound volume setting content in the setting No. is set.

  The possible range of the volume is determined in advance. Specifically, for example, 25 levels from “2” to “26” (the larger the number, the larger the volume) are defined as the volume. For example, when the setting number is “V1”, ten channels “0” to “9” and six channels “A” to “F” are defined as channels. Here, the channel can change the setting position by twisting a setting changeover switch 460 of the data display device 4 (to be described later) by twisting a store manager or a store clerk, and setting the volume according to the channel. It can be changed.

  In the initial display volume, when the data display device 4 is turned on, when the channel is changed by the initial setting operation of the setting changeover switch 460 or by operating the setting changeover switch 460 halfway, A volume level (second volume level) to be highlighted on the setting screen displayed as the initial display is determined. As the channel number increases, a larger value is set as the initial display volume. That is, the initial display volume is determined such that the higher the first volume level, the higher the second volume level displayed as the initial display.

  In the actual volume range, a range in which the volume can be actually taken is defined. The number in parentheses indicates the volume level that is highlighted at that volume.

This will be specifically described.
(1) Setting No “V1”
In the setting of “V1”, “2” to “14” are defined as ranges in which the player can change the volume. For channels “0” to “9”, the initial display volume is “2”, “3”, “4”, “6”, “8”, “10”, “11”, “12”, “12”, “ “13” and “14” are defined.

  For channels “0” to “4”, “2 (2)” to “14 (14)” are defined as actual volume ranges, and for channels “5” to “9” “10 (2)” to “22 (14)” are defined as the volume range. In other words, when the channel is “0” to “4”, when the volume increases to “2”, “3”, “4”,. “2”, “3”, “4”,... “14”. That is, the actual volume is the same value as the second volume level.

  On the other hand, when the channel is “5” to “9”, when the volume increases to “2”, “3”, “4”,. Correspondingly, “10”, “11”, “12”. That is, the actual volume is a value obtained by adding “8” to the value of the second volume level.

  For the channels “A” to “F”, the setting of the second volume level is limited, and the volume is fixedly determined. Specifically, “2”, “4”, “7”, “11”, “16”, and “22” are defined as fixed volumes for the channels “A” to “F”, respectively.

(2) Setting No. “V2”
In the setting of “V2”, “3” to “16” are defined as ranges in which the player can change the volume. For channels “0” to “9”, the initial display volume is “3”, “4”, “5”, “7”, “9”, “11”, “13”, “14”, “ “15” and “16” are defined respectively.

  For channels “0” to “4”, “3 (3)” to “16 (16)” are defined as actual volume ranges, and for channels “5” to “9” “11 (3)” to “24 (16)” are defined as the volume range. In other words, when the channel is “0” to “4”, the actual volume corresponds to this as the volume increases to “3”, “4”, “5”,. “3”, “4”, “5”,... “16”. That is, the actual volume is the same value as the second volume level.

  On the other hand, when the channel is “5” to “9”, when the volume increases to “3”, “4”, “5”,. Correspondingly, “11”, “12”, “13”. That is, the actual volume is a value obtained by adding “8” to the value of the second volume level.

  For the channels “A” to “F”, the setting of the second volume level is limited, and the volume is fixedly determined. Specifically, “3”, “5”, “8”, “12”, “17”, and “24” are defined as fixed volumes for the channels “A” to “F”, respectively.

(3) Setting No “V2”
In the setting of “V3”, “4” to “18” are defined as ranges in which the player can change the volume. For channels “0” to “9”, the initial display volume is “4”, “5”, “6”, “8”, “10”, “12”, “13”, “15”, “15”, “ “17” and “18” are defined respectively.

  For channels “0” to “4”, “4 (4)” to “18 (18)” are defined as the actual volume range, and for channels “5” to “9” “12 (4)” to “26 (18)” are defined as the volume range. In other words, when the channel is “0” to “4”, the actual volume corresponds to this when the volume increases to “4”, “5”, “6”,. “4”, “5”, “6”,... “18”. That is, the actual volume is the same value as the second volume level.

  On the other hand, when the channel is “5” to “9”, when the volume increases to “4”, “5”, “6”,. Correspondingly, “12”, “13”, “14”. That is, the actual volume is a value obtained by adding “8” to the value of the second volume level.

  For the channels “A” to “F”, the setting of the second volume level is limited, and the volume is fixedly determined. Specifically, “4”, “7”, “10”, “16”, “23”, and “26” are defined as fixed volumes for the channels “A” to “F”, respectively.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume setting table 684 defines a plurality of volume data including a volume changeable range and detailed volume setting contents, and a data display is selected from the plurality of volume data. Volume setting data 693 related to the device 4 is arbitrarily generated on the store side and can be applied to the data display device 4.

The light amount setting table 685 is a table used for setting the light amount of light emitted from the display units (first display unit 430 and second display unit 440) and the light emitting unit 455 of the data display device 4, and the table. An example of the configuration is shown in FIG.
In the light amount setting table 685, a setting number, a light amount changeable range, and a detailed light amount setting content are defined in association with each other.

The setting number is a number for uniquely identifying the setting of the light amount range, and a serial number such as “L1”, “L2”, “L3”,.
The light quantity changeable range is a range in which the player can change the light quantity in the setting of No, and a percentage [%] corresponding to the light quantity is determined.
In the detailed light amount setting content, detailed setting content of the light amount in the setting No. is set.

  The possible range of the amount of light is determined in advance. Specifically, for example, a level of “30%” to “100%” (the larger the number, the larger the light amount) is determined for the light amount. For example, when the setting number is “V1”, ten channels “0” to “9” and six channels “A” to “F” are defined as channels.

The initial display light amount is the initial value when the channel is changed by the initial setting operation of the setting changeover switch 460 after the data display device 4 is turned on or by operating the setting changeover switch 460 halfway. The light intensity level to be highlighted on the setting screen displayed as a display is determined. The larger the channel number, the larger the initial display light amount.
In the actual light amount range, a range in which the light amount can be actually taken is determined.

This will be specifically described.
(1) Setting No “L1”
In the setting of “L1”, “30%” to “100%” is defined as a range in which the player can change the light amount. As for the channels “0” to “9”, the initial display light amount is “30%” for the channels “0” and “1”, “45%” for the channels “2” and “3”. “50” is defined for “4” and “5”, “75%” is defined for channels “6” and “7”, and “100%” is defined for channels “8” and “9”. Yes.

  In addition, for channels “0” to “3”, “30%”, “45%”, and “100%” are defined as actual volume ranges, and channels “4” to “9” are actually “50%”, “75%”, and “100%” are defined as the light amount range of the light source.

  For the channels “A” to “F”, the setting of the second light quantity stage is limited, and the light quantity is fixedly determined. Specifically, “30%” for channels “A” and “B”, “75%” for channels “C” and “D”, and “100%” for channels “E” and “F”. "Is defined respectively.

(2) Setting No. “L2”
In the setting of “L2”, “40%” to “90%” is defined as a range in which the player can change the amount of light. For channels “0” to “9”, the initial display light amount is “40%” for channels “0” and “1”, “55%” for channels “2” and “3”. “65” is defined for “4” and “5”, “80%” is defined for channels “6” and “7”, and “90%” is defined for channels “8” and “9”. Yes.

  For channels “0” to “3”, “40%”, “55%”, and “90%” are defined as actual volume ranges, and channels “4” to “9” are actually set. "65%", "80%", and "90%" are defined as the light amount range of the first and second light amounts.

  For the channels “A” to “F”, the setting of the second light quantity stage is limited, and the light quantity is fixedly determined. Specifically, “40%” for channels “A” and “B”, “65%” for channels “C” and “D”, and “90%” for channels “E” and “F”. "Is defined respectively.

(3) Setting No “L3”
In the setting of “L3”, “50%” to “80%” is defined as a range in which the player can change the light amount. For channels “0” to “9”, the initial display light amount is “50%” for channels “0” and “1”, and “60%” for channels “2” and “3”. “65” is defined for “4” and “5”, “70%” is defined for channels “6” and “7”, and “80%” is defined for channels “8” and “9”. Yes.

  For channels “0” to “3”, “50%”, “60%”, and “80%” are defined as actual volume ranges, and channels “4” to “9” are actually “65%”, “70%”, and “80%” are defined as the light amount range of the light source.

  For the channels “A” to “F”, the setting of the second light quantity stage is limited, and the light quantity is fixedly determined. Specifically, “50%” for channels “A” and “B”, “70%” for channels “C” and “D”, and “80%” for channels “E” and “F”. "Is defined respectively.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of light amount data including the light amount changeable range and the detailed light amount setting content are determined in the light amount setting table 685, and data display is performed from the plurality of light amount data. Light amount setting data 695 related to the device 4 is arbitrarily generated on the store side and can be applied to the data display device 4.

The game total database 688 is a database in which data related to games in the pachinko machine 2 is stored, and an example of the data configuration is shown in FIG.
In the game total database 688, game total data of the pachinko machine 2 is stored for each pachinko machine 2. Each game total data stores a pachinko machine ID, which is identification information of the pachinko machine 2, a model name, and daily game total data.

  In the daily game total data, in correspondence with the date, the difference total data that totaled the difference ball, the start count total data that totaled the start count, the big hit count data that totaled the big hit count, and the difference graph data Is memorized.

  In the difference ball total data, time, out, safe, and difference balls are associated and stored in time series. The difference ball graph data, which is the difference ball graph data of the day, is generated from the difference ball data.

  The jackpot count data stores the number of jackpots on that day. The number of big hits usually includes the number of big hits, the number of probability variation big hits, the number of latent probability variations, and the number of time reductions. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, since there exists a model with a small hit or a certainty depending on the model of the pachinko machine 2, the frequency | count of these occurrences is also memorize | stored in big hit total data.

  The sales management database 689 is a database in which data related to sales in the pachinko machine 2 installed in the store is stored. The sales management database 689 stores sales management data for managing information related to store sales. For example, the sales management data (the machine number and the premium rate), the payout rate, the customer delay rate, the sales balls, the premium balls, Data for sales management such as the amount of free gifts and the gross profit of the ball is tabulated by the processing unit 610 and stored.

  The RAM 690 is a readable / writable volatile memory, and in this embodiment, display setting data 691 in which display contents, display conditions, and display modes for each data display device 4 are set, and a volume range for each data display device 4. Are stored, and volume setting data 695 for setting the light intensity range for each data display device 4 is stored. The RAM 690 is backed up by a battery (not shown), and data stored for a predetermined period is retained even when the power is turned off.

The display setting data 691 is set individually for each data display device 4 by the processing unit 610 based on the display content setting table 681, the simultaneous effect display setting table 682, and the display mode setting table 683 described above. FIG. 13 shows an example of the data configuration.
The display setting data 691 includes a data display device ID that is an ID of the data display device 4 to which the display setting data 691 is applied, and an ID of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4. Corresponding pachinko machine ID, setting data, and simultaneous production setting data are stored in association with each other.

In the setting data, a display type, display contents, and a display pattern are stored in association with each other.
The display content and the display pattern include the display content and the display pattern of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440, respectively. In the simultaneous effect setting data, the simultaneous effect type, the simultaneous effect display condition, and the simultaneous effect video data 493 are stored in association with each other.

  Such display setting data 691 is individually created for each of the plurality of data display devices 4, and is transmitted to the corresponding data display device 4, so that it is appropriate for each data display device 4 regardless of the model of the pachinko machine 2. It is possible to perform a correct display.

The volume setting data 693 is volume setting data that the processing unit 610 individually sets for each data display device 4 based on the volume setting table 684 described above. An example of the data configuration is shown in FIG. Shown in
The volume setting data 693 includes a data display device ID that is an ID of the data display device 4 to which the volume setting data 693 is applied, and an ID of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4. Corresponding pachinko machine IDs, setting numbers, and volume data are stored in association with each other. The sound volume data includes a sound volume changeable range and detailed sound volume setting contents determined in association with the setting No. in the sound volume setting table 684 of FIG.

  The data display device 4 sets / changes the volume based on the channel setting by the operation (first operation) of the setting changeover switch 460 and the volume data included in the volume setting data 693 transmitted from the hall computer 6. I do.

The light amount setting data 695 is setting data of a light amount range that the processing unit 610 individually sets for each data display device 4 based on the light amount setting table 685 described above. An example of the data configuration is shown in FIG. Shown in
The light amount setting data 695 includes a data display device ID which is an ID of the data display device 4 to which the light amount setting data 695 is applied, and an ID of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4. The corresponding pachinko machine ID, the setting No., and the light amount data are stored in association with each other. The light amount data includes the light amount changeable range and the detailed light amount setting content determined in association with the setting number in the light amount setting table 685 of FIG.

  The data display device 4 sets / changes the light amount based on the channel setting by the operation (first operation) of the setting changeover switch 460 and the light amount data included in the light amount setting data 695 transmitted from the hall computer 6. I do.

  In the display setting data 691, the volume setting data 693, and the light amount setting data 695, instead of the corresponding pachinko machine ID, the type of the pachinko machine 2 and the game island may be set. According to this, the display setting, the volume setting, and the light amount setting of the data display device 4 can be collectively performed for each type of pachinko machine 2 or for each game island. For example, a store manager operates the hall computer 6. Thus, it is possible to make adjustments for each data display device 4 while confirming the type of pachinko machine 2 and the game island.

[1-6. Configuration of data display device]
16 and 17 are diagrams illustrating an example of an external configuration of the data display device 4.
The data display device 4 includes a first display unit 430 for displaying game information based on at least information output from the pachinko machine 2 for a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2, and a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2. And a second display unit 440 for displaying information for other players, that is, surrounding players.

  In the data display device 4, a speaker as the sound output unit 450 is installed at the center of the upper surface of the housing so that the sound output port faces the front. Note that the installation position of the speaker can be changed as appropriate. For example, the speaker may be installed at either the left or right position on the upper surface of the casing or at a predetermined position on the side of the casing of the data display device 4.

  In the following description, based on the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2, the front and back directions with respect to the player are the front and rear directions, the right and left directions with respect to the player are the left and right directions, and the player is the reference. Up and down directions are defined as up and down directions, respectively.

  FIG. 16A and FIG. 16B are perspective views of the data display device 4. The housing of the data display device 4 includes a base portion 4A having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a door portion configured to protrude forward from the right end portion and the left end portion of the base portion 4A. 4B. The left and right door portions 4B are designed so that the width thereof is half the width of the base portion 4A.

  FIG. 16 (3) is a front view of the data display device 4. A first display portion 430 having a horizontally long rectangular shape in the left-right direction when viewed from the front is formed on the front surface of the base portion 4A. The first display unit 430 is formed so as to face the player, and a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 can visually recognize the first display unit 430 from the game position. That is, the first display unit 430 is formed in a direction in which the player can visually recognize the game position from which the player plays.

  FIG. 16 (4) is a right side view of the data display device 4. A second display portion 440 for displaying information for players other than the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 is formed on one of the left and right surfaces of the door portion 4B. The second display portion 440 is formed on the right side of the right door portion 4B when viewed from the player and on the left side of the left door portion 4B when viewed from the player. That is, the 2nd display part 440 is formed in the outer surface of each door part 4B, and the player cannot visually recognize the 2nd display part 440 from a game position. On the other hand, a player other than a player who does not view the pachinko machine 2 from the front, for example, a player who selects the pachinko machine 2 that starts the game by looking over the pachinko machine 2 of the game island from the edge of the game island, The second display unit 440 can be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (2), the left and right door portions 4B are configured to be foldable and housed inward. Specifically, the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inward by hinge portions 4C, respectively. Since the width of the left and right door portions 4B is designed to be half the width of the base portion 4A excluding the hinge portion 4C, when the left and right door portions 4B are closed, the base portion 4A just overlaps. At this time, the left and right door portions 4B are parallel to the base portion 4A, and the first display portion 430 is covered with the left and right door portions 4B. Since the left and right door portions 4B can be folded inward in this manner, the left and right door portions 4B are folded when the data display device 4 is installed on the game island or removed from the game island. The installation work and the removal work can be easily performed.

  In addition, the second display unit 440 is formed on an outer surface that is not visible to the player when the door unit 4B is opened. However, when the door unit 4B is closed, the player displays the second display unit 440. It will be in a state visible from the front. Thus, in the data display device 4, the first display unit 430 is visible to the player, but the second display unit 440 is not visible to the player (while the players other than the player can see). 1 state (a state in which the second display unit 440 is perpendicular to the first display unit 430) and the player cannot see the first display unit 430, but the second display unit 440 It is also possible to enter a second state (a state in which the second display unit 440 is parallel to the first display unit 430) that can be visually recognized by the player.

  FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a detailed configuration of the second display unit 440. In this embodiment, the 2nd display part 440 is comprised so that attachment or detachment of the transparent plastic lid 447 which covers the whole 2nd display part 440 is carried out. The display surface of the second display portion 440 protrudes from the housing surface with the door portion 4B open (the right door portion 4B protrudes to the right, and the left door portion 4B protrudes to the left. And an outward fitting step portion 441 that forms a step between the housing surface of the second display portion 440 and the display surface of the second display portion 440 is provided.

  A plastic lid 447 shown in FIG. 17 is a lid member in which a peripheral wall 443 protrudes from the outer peripheral edge of the bottom plate 442, and has a tray shape in which the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 are integrally formed of a light-transmitting plastic material. Have. An inward fitting step 444 that forms a step between the surface of the bottom plate 442 where the peripheral wall 443 protrudes and the end surface (tray-shaped edge surface) of the peripheral wall 443 is provided. By fitting the mating step portion 444 with the outward fitting step portion 441, the inner surface of the inward fitting step portion 444 is engaged with the outer surface of the outward fitting step portion 441, and the plastic lid 447 The second display unit 440 is integrated.

  Further, the recess formed by the bottom plate 442 and the peripheral wall 443 of the plastic lid 447 is configured to be able to insert a POP advertisement 445 for notifying the player of various types of information. In the POP advertisement 445, for example, information related to sales of a store where the pachinko machine 2 is installed and information related to an event performed in the store can be posted.

  In FIG. 17, as an example of the POP advertisement 445, a POP advertisement 445 indicating that the current day is Ladies' Day, which is one of the event days, is illustrated. When the POP advertisement 445 is inserted into the recess of the plastic lid 447 and the inward fitting step 444 is fitted to the outward fitting step 441 of the door 4B, the POP advertisement 445 is attached to the bottom plate 442. It is supported by being sandwiched between the display surface of the second display unit 440 and covers the display screen of the second display unit 440.

  In addition, since the plastic lid 447 has translucency, the inserted POP advertisement 445 can be visually recognized by the player from the outside through the bottom plate 442. The pachinko machine 2 on which the POP advertisement 445 for Ladies' Day is placed on the corresponding data display device 4 is a stand exclusively for women, and only women can play games.

  It should be noted that the POP advertisement is not limited to the notification of the above event data. For example, new machine information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 installed corresponding to the data display device 4 is a new machine, Various kinds of information such as a yen pachinko machine, a 2-yen pachinko machine, a 1-yen pachinko machine, information indicating the model name of the pachinko machine 2 can be posted.

  Thus, by making it possible to attach the plastic lid 447 to the second display portion 440, it is possible to prevent the player from visually recognizing information for players other than the player. Further, by attaching a plastic lid 447 with a POP advertisement interposed, surrounding players can confirm information regarding the store and the pachinko machine 2. In addition, when the second display unit 440 is covered with a POP advertisement or the like in this manner, the second display unit 440 displays that the latent probability change state is displayed, and the display is displayed to the player and other than the player. When the player does not want to show the player, the display on the second display unit 440 can be made invisible.

  Here, in order to set the second display unit 440 so as not to display that the latent probability changing state is displayed, the second display unit 440 is in the latent probability changing state on the hall computer 6 or each data display device 4 side. It is necessary to perform a setting process for preventing the message from being displayed. On the other hand, when the second display unit 440 is covered with a cover such as a POP advertisement, such setting processing is not required, and it is temporarily displayed on the second display unit 440 that the latent probability changing state is displayed. Even so, it is possible to prevent the player and players other than the player from seeing this.

  Also, for example, on an event day such as Ladies' Day, only the player (for example, female customer) who is the target of the event is operated so that the second display unit 440 can be viewed by removing the POP advertisement or the like. Also good. Furthermore, when a player (for example, a female customer) who is the subject of such an event plays a game, the POP advertisement is removed and the door 4B is folded inward (the second state described above). The second display unit 440 may be visible from the player, and the latent probability changing state may be displayed on the second display unit. According to this, only a specific player such as an event subject can view the display content of the second display unit 440.

  In FIG. 17, the plastic cover 447 is illustrated as a cover that covers the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, but the cover is not limited thereto. If the cover is a lid, it is not limited to the plastic lid 447 but may be a glass lid or a wooden lid. Moreover, it is good also considering the housing surrounding the 2nd display part 440 as a cover other than a cover as a cover which concerns on this invention. The housing can be, for example, a colored plastic, vinyl, or wooden housing.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the housing in this case.
A housing 448 is detachably configured to surround the entire door portion 4B on which the second display portion 440 is formed. Specifically, a casing 448 formed in a U-shape in front view so as to surround a surface of the door portion 4B other than the bonding surface of the hinge portion 4C is configured to be attachable to the door portion 4B. By attaching such a housing 448 to the door portion 4B, it is possible to create a state in which the second display portion 440 cannot be further visually recognized by a player playing a game machine.

  Note that the housing 448 may have a bottomed structure including a bottom part surrounding the inner surface of the door part 4B, or may have a bottomless structure without a bottom part. When the bottomed structure is adopted, the inner surface of the door portion 4B is surrounded by the housing 448, so that even the inner surface of the door portion 4B cannot be seen by the player, as if the player It is possible to create a state as if they were isolated.

  In addition, the above-described cover is not necessarily a cover that covers the entire second display unit 440, and may be a cover that covers a part of the second display unit 440. For example, a cover that covers only the center of the second display unit 440 may be used, or a cover that covers the right half, the left half, the upper half, and the lower half of the second display unit 440. Moreover, it is good also as a cover body which covers the circumference | surroundings of the 2nd display part 440. FIG.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the data display device 4. The same data as the data stored in the hall computer 6 is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the description thereof is omitted.

  The data display device 4 includes a processing unit 410, an operation unit 420, a first display unit 430, a second display unit 440, a sound output unit 450, a light emitting unit 455, a setting changeover switch 460, and a clock unit 465. A short-range wireless communication unit 475, a first communication unit 470, a second communication unit 480, a third communication unit 485, and a storage unit 490.

  The processing unit 410 is a control device and arithmetic device that comprehensively controls each unit of the data display device 4 in accordance with various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 490, such as a processor such as a CPU or DSP, an ASIC, or the like The integrated circuit is configured.

  In the present embodiment, the processing unit 410 includes, as main functional units, a first display control unit 411, a second display control unit 412, a possessed ball special display processing unit 413, a specific sound output control unit 414, and a confirmation. A sound output control unit 415, a volume setting unit 416, a volume change unit 417, and a light amount change unit 418 are provided.

  The operation unit 420 is an input unit having a touch panel 421 configured integrally with the first display unit 430, and outputs an operation input signal for the touch panel 421 to the processing unit 410. By a tap operation on the touch panel 421, a player or another player can perform various instruction operations such as calling a store clerk, selecting a menu, selecting a service, and selecting a display screen. In the present embodiment, the volume / light quantity can be changed by a tap operation on the touch panel 421.

  In addition to the touch panel 421 or in place of the touch panel 421, the operation unit 420 includes operation buttons including a cross key and a determination button. By pressing the operation button, a player or another player can control the volume. Needless to say, an instruction operation such as a change in the amount of light may be performed. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that various instruction operations are all performed by a tap operation on the touch panel 421.

  The state in which the volume changing operation is enabled in the operation unit 420 corresponds to a state in which the second permission condition for the store visitor including the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 (game machine) is satisfied. Further, the volume change operation for the operation unit 420 by the customer corresponds to the second operation, and setting the volume according to the customer's volume change operation is based on the fact that the second operation has been performed. This corresponds to setting one of the volume levels as the second volume level. The volume level that is changed based on the visitor's operation is referred to as a “second volume level”.

  The first display unit 430 is a display formed on the base unit 4A as described above, and includes an LCD or the like, and various displays based on a display control signal output from the first display control unit 411. It is the display device which performs.

  The second display unit 440 is a display formed on the door unit 4B as described above, and includes an LCD or the like, and various displays based on display control signals output from the second display control unit 412. It is the display device which performs.

  The sound output unit 450 is a sound output device that outputs various sounds based on the sound output control signal output from the processing unit 410, and includes a speaker or the like. The sound output unit 450 is configured to output a specific sound and a confirmation sound in accordance with the control of the processing unit 410.

  The light emitting unit 455 is a light emitting device configured to include an effect lamp, a decoration LED, and the like, and can turn on / flash the effect lamp and the decoration LED with various emission colors according to the control of the processing unit 410. It is configured.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (1), the setting changeover switch 460 is a changeover switch having a total of 16 channels from “0” to “9” and “A” to “F”, and is a displacement portion. By turning the knob, 16 channels can be switched. In the present embodiment, a first volume level and a first light quantity level are set corresponding to each channel. That is, if the channel is “0”, the first volume level and the first light intensity level corresponding to “0” are set,..., And if the channel is “F”, the first level corresponding to “F” is set. One volume level and a first light intensity level are set.

  The setting changeover switch 460 is connected to the processing unit 410 directly or via a predetermined circuit as shown in FIG. 20 (2), and the processing unit 410 directly outputs a signal corresponding to the channel of the setting changeover switch 460. Alternatively, the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 can be specified by inputting indirectly. The setting changeover switch 460 can be operated only by a person concerned in the store and is housed inside the data display device 4.

  For example, the store employee can open and close the front door of the data display device 4 (normally, customers including players cannot open and close). When the employee opens the front door, the employee can rotate the member on which the processing unit 410 or the like is disposed around the rotation axis provided in the data display device 4. As a result, the store employee can operate the setting changeover switch 460.

  On the other hand, the visitor cannot operate the setting changeover switch 460 because the front door cannot be opened. That is, the setting changeover switch 460 is a store operation unit. In other words, in the present embodiment, the opening of the front door is a condition that allows the setting changeover switch 460 to be operated (first permission condition for performing a store operation).

  As described above, the state in which the setting changeover switch 460 is operable corresponds to the time when the first permission condition for the store where the data display device 4 is installed is satisfied, and is determined by the store employee. The operation on the setting changeover switch 460 corresponds to the first operation. Setting the channel according to the position of the knob of the setting changeover switch 460 corresponds to setting any one of the plurality of volume levels as the first volume level. The volume level set based on the store setting operation is defined as a “first volume level”.

  In the present embodiment, when the second sound level is newly set by the second operation of the store visitor including the player, the confirmation sound output control unit 415 generates a confirmation sound indicating that from the sound output unit 450. However, when the first volume level is newly set by the first operation of the person concerned in the store, the sound output unit 450 is controlled not to output the confirmation sound indicating that.

  The clock unit 465 is an internal clock of the data display device 4 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including the date) of the clock unit 465 is output to the processing unit 410. Further, the clock unit 465 has a timer function, and functions as a confirmation sound output timer or the like to be described later. That is, the clock unit 465 functions as a time measuring unit.

  The short-range wireless communication unit 475 is a communication device that performs wireless communication with a communication device such as a setting remote controller owned by a store clerk. As a method in which the short-range wireless communication unit 475 performs wireless communication, infrared communication can be typically applied. In addition to infrared communication, for example, a short-range wireless communication module that realizes short-range wireless communication conforming to a communication standard such as ZigBee (registered trademark) or Bluetooth (registered trademark) is incorporated, and wireless communication is performed according to these communication methods. It is also possible to perform.

  The first communication unit 470 is a communication device for performing communication with the pachinko machine 2, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. The 1st communication part 470 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives various game signals from the pachinko machine 2 according to a parallel communication system.

  When the pachinko machine 2 is an encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, the first communication unit 470 is provided with a serial communication terminal for receiving a game signal including information on points from the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B in a serial communication method. The game signal may be received from the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B according to the serial communication method.

  The second communication unit 480 is a communication device for performing communication with the hall computer 6, and includes a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable, for example. The second communication unit 480 has a parallel communication terminal, and setting data such as display setting data 691, volume setting data 693, and light amount setting data 695 from the hall computer 6 according to the parallel communication method, and a simultaneous effect display instruction signal A display instruction signal including is received.

  The third communication unit 485 is a communication device for performing communication with the inter-counter counting unit 5, and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The third communication unit 485 has a parallel communication terminal, and receives the possessed ball number signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 according to the parallel communication method.

  The storage unit 490 is a storage device including a volatile or nonvolatile memory such as a ROM, a flash ROM, or a RAM.

  The storage unit 490 stores a main program 491 that is read by the processing unit 410 and executed as a main process. The main program 491 includes a display processing program 491a executed as display processing, a possessed ball special display processing program 491b executed as possessed ball special display processing, and a volume etc. setting processing program 491c executed as volume etc. setting processing. Further, a volume change processing program 491d executed as the volume change processing and a light quantity change processing program 491e executed as the light quantity change processing are included as subroutines. These processes will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  The storage unit 490 also has display image data 492, simultaneous effect video data 493, a possessed ball special display threshold table 495, a display mode setting table 683, display setting data 691, and volume settings. Data 693, light amount setting data 695, possessed ball number data 497, and processing data 499 are stored.

  The display image data 492 is image data to be displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440. In the present embodiment, the display image data 492 includes data of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image when the possessed ball special display is performed.

  The simultaneous effect video data 493 is video data of the simultaneous effect displayed on the first display unit 430 during the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 2. The simultaneous effect video data 493 includes video data for performing a big hit running effect, promotional video data of the pachinko machine 2, video data of hidden characters and mascot characters of the pachinko machine 2, live video data of the pachinko machine 2 and the like. Includes various video data.

The possessed ball special display threshold value table 495 is a table that defines display threshold values for the possessed ball when the first display unit 430 performs the possessed ball special display. An example of the table configuration is shown in FIG.
In the possessed sphere special display threshold table 495, four display thresholds are defined, which are a first display threshold, a first non-display threshold, a second display threshold, and a second non-display threshold.

The first display threshold value is a threshold value for the number of possessed balls for displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430, and is set to 1000 shots, for example. The first display threshold corresponds to the first value.
The first non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed spheres for making the first predetermined image displayed on the first display unit 430 non-display, and for example, 800 is set. The first non-display threshold corresponds to the second value.

  The first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value are determined to have a difference corresponding to a predetermined number of balls (hereinafter referred to as “first predetermined number”). Specifically, since the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the first non-display threshold is 800 shots, the first non-display threshold is set to a value 200 smaller than the first display threshold as the first predetermined number. It has been. As described above, the difference between the first display threshold and the first non-display threshold by the first predetermined number is that the display / non-display of the first predetermined image is performed by increasing / decreasing the number of possessed balls just before the threshold. The purpose is to prevent frequent switching.

  In the present embodiment, the first predetermined number of 200 shots is set based on the number by which the number of possessed balls of the player decreases at a predetermined opportunity. In the present embodiment, a case where the predetermined opportunity is a one-time refund of the game ball by the player's refund operation is illustrated. With the player's refund operation, 125 game balls are refunded to the player at a time. That is, the number of possessed balls of the player that is reduced by one refund operation is 125 shots. The first predetermined number is 200 shots with a margin of 75 shots for the refund number of 125 shots.

The second display threshold value is a threshold value for the number of possessed balls for displaying the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430, and for example, 5000 shots are set. The second display threshold corresponds to the third value.
The second non-display threshold is a threshold for the number of possessed spheres for making the second predetermined image displayed on the first display unit 430 non-display, and for example, 4600 shots are set. The second non-display threshold corresponds to the fourth value.

  The second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value are also determined to have a difference corresponding to a predetermined number of balls (hereinafter referred to as “second predetermined number”). Specifically, in the above example, the second display threshold value is 5000 shots and the second non-display threshold value is 4600 shots. Therefore, the second non-display threshold value is 400 as the second predetermined number rather than the second display threshold value. A small value is set. In this way, the second predetermined number of differences is provided between the second display threshold and the second non-display threshold. The display non-display of the second predetermined image is performed by increasing or decreasing the number of possessed balls just before the threshold. The purpose is to prevent frequent switching.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, the threshold value is set so that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. In the above example, since the first predetermined number is 200 and the second predetermined number is 400, the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number. The purpose of this is to make conditions for non-display of the second predetermined image stricter than conditions for non-display of the first predetermined image. The second predetermined image is a special image different from the first predetermined image to be displayed when the number of possessed balls reaches a large number such as 5000 or 10,000, and gives the player a sense of superiority and the surrounding games Since the purpose is to appeal to customers, the second predetermined image is less likely to be hidden compared to the first predetermined image.

Note that the first predetermined number and the second predetermined number need to be numbers that do not exceed the first display threshold.
Further, in the above example, the number (200 shots) with a margin is set as the first predetermined number, which is a number that reduces the number of balls possessed by the player (125 shots) by one refund operation. Instead of this, the number (125 shots) by which the number of balls possessed by the player is reduced by one refund operation may be determined as the first predetermined number. The first predetermined number may be determined based on the first display threshold. In this case, a number that is preferably 1/3 or less of the first display threshold value, more preferably a number that is 1/5 or less of the first display threshold value, is set as the first predetermined number.

  In the present embodiment, the second predetermined number is described as being greater than the first predetermined number. However, the same number as the first predetermined number may be determined as the second predetermined number. Good. That is, in the above example, the second predetermined number may be the same 200 as the first predetermined number. However, it is desirable that the second predetermined number is larger than the first predetermined number, and it is preferable to set a number about 1.5 to 2 times the first predetermined number as the second predetermined number. .

  Also, unlike the above, the number indicated by the number of possessed balls output from the inter-unit counting unit 5 in one signal may be determined as the first predetermined number. For example, if the inter-counter counting unit 5 is configured to output the possessed ball number signal to the data display device 4 every time the count value of the game balls reaches 100, the possessed ball number signal is a signal of one time. Since the number indicated by 100 is 100 shots, the 100 shots may be determined as the first predetermined number.

  The display setting data 691 is display setting data received from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480, and the data structure is as described with reference to FIG.

  The volume setting data 693 is volume setting data received from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480, and the data structure is as described with reference to FIG.

  The light quantity setting data 695 is the light quantity setting data received from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480, and the data structure is as described with reference to FIG.

  The possessed ball number data 497 is data storing the number of possessed balls of the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2 corresponding to the data display device 4, and the number of possessed balls received from the inter-unit counting unit 5 at an intermittent timing. Updated based on the signal.

  The processing data 499 is processing data for the processing unit 410 to perform the possessed ball special display in the possessed ball special display process, and includes a first display counter value, a second display counter value, a first integer n, a first integer, Data for processing such as 2 integer m and the number of intermediate possessed balls is temporarily stored.

[1-7. Process flow]
[1-7-1. Hall computer processing]
22 and 23 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of management processing executed by the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 according to the management program 671 stored in the ROM 670.

  The processing unit 610 performs loop A processing for each data display device 4 (A1 to A11). The loop A means that each step in the loop A is executed for each data display device 4 in order or in parallel.

  In loop A, the display setting unit 611 performs display setting processing for the data display device 4 (A3). Specifically, the display setting unit 611 uses the display content setting table 681, the simultaneous effect display setting table 682 and the display mode setting table 683 stored in the hard disk 680, to display the data display device 4. Display setting data 691 is generated and stored in the RAM 690 (A3a).

  Next, the volume setting unit 615 performs a volume setting process for the data display device 4 (A5). Specifically, volume setting data 693 for the data display device 4 is generated using the volume setting table 684 stored in the hard disk 680, and stored in the RAM 690 (A5a).

  The light amount setting unit 617 performs light amount setting processing for the data display device 4 (A7). Specifically, the light quantity setting data 695 for the data display device 4 is generated using the light quantity setting table 685 stored in the hard disk 680 and stored in the RAM 690 (A7a).

  Next, the processing unit 610 performs connection confirmation with the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 (A7), and if the connection confirmation is obtained, the generated display setting data 691, Each setting data of the volume setting data 693 and the light quantity setting data 695 is transmitted to the data display device 4 (A9). Then, the process moves to the next data display device 4.

  When the processing of the loop A for all the next data display devices 4 is completed (A11), the processing unit 610 performs the processing of the loop B for each pachinko machine 2 (A13 to A19). The loop B means that each step in the loop B is executed for each pachinko machine 2 in order or in parallel.

  In the loop B, the processing unit 610 receives a game signal from the pachinko machine 2 via the first communication unit 640 (A15). Based on the received game signal, the game totaling unit 613 updates the game total data of the pachinko machine 2 and stores it in the game total database 688 of the hard disk 680 (A17). Then, the process moves to the next pachinko machine 2.

  When the processing of loop B for all the next pachinko machines 2 is completed (A19), the processing unit 610 determines whether or not the display condition for the big hit running effect is satisfied (A21), and determines that it is satisfied. If so (A21; Yes), a big hit running effect display instruction signal is transmitted to each data display device 4 (A23). At this time, in order to cause the data display device 4 to perform a big hit running effect with a predetermined time difference, a big hit running effect display instruction signal is applied to each data display device 4 with a delay corresponding to the above time difference. Send. Then, the processing unit 610 moves the process to A29.

  If it is determined that the display condition for the big hit running effect is not satisfied (A21; No), the processing unit 610 determines whether or not other simultaneous effect display conditions are satisfied (A25), and determines that the display condition is satisfied. If so (A25; Yes), a display instruction signal for a simultaneous effect video corresponding to the established simultaneous effect display condition is transmitted to each data display device 4 (A27). Then, the processing unit 610 moves the process to A29. If it is determined that the other simultaneous effect display conditions are not satisfied (A25; No), the processing unit 610 moves the process to A29.

  In A29, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not it is a simultaneous production end timing (A29). If it is determined that it is the end timing (A29; Yes), the processing unit 610 transmits a simultaneous effect display end instruction signal to each data display device 4 (A31). If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the simultaneous performance (A29; No), the processing unit 610 moves the process to A33.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 610 determines whether or not to end the processing (A33). For example, when the power of the hall computer 6 is turned off when the store is closed, it is determined that the process is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (A33; No), the process part 610 will return a process to A13. If it is determined that the process is to be terminated (A33; Yes), the management process is terminated.

[1-7-2. Data display device processing]
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of main processing executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 according to the main program 491 stored in the storage unit 490.

  First, the processing unit 410 establishes communication with the hall computer 6 (B1). Then, the processing unit 410 requests the hall computer 6 to transmit each setting data of the data display device 4 (B3).

  Next, the processing unit 410 receives the display setting data 691 from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480 and stores it in the storage unit 490 (B5). Further, the processing unit 410 receives the volume setting data 693 from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480 and stores it in the storage unit 490 (B7). Further, the processing unit 410 receives the light amount setting data 695 from the hall computer 6 via the second communication unit 480 and stores it in the storage unit 490 (B9).

  Next, the processing unit 410 performs processing related to the initial display setting of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 based on the received display setting data 691 (B11). Specifically, the display setting data 691 is stored in the storage unit 490 so that the display setting data 691 can be read and displayed on the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 as defaults. And display mode.

  Further, the processing unit 410 performs processing related to the initial setting of the volume of the sound output unit 450 based on the received volume setting data 693 (B13). Specifically, the volume setting data 693 is stored in the storage unit 490 so that the volume setting data 693 can be read, and the volume of a specific sound to be output from the sound output unit 450 is set as a default.

  Further, the processing unit 410 performs processing related to the initial setting of the light amounts of the first display unit 430 and the light emitting unit 455 based on the received light amount setting data 695 (B15). Specifically, the light amount setting data 695 is stored in the storage unit 490 so that the light amount setting data 695 can be read, and the first display unit 430, the second display unit 440, and the light emitting unit 455 are set as defaults. Sets the amount of light to be emitted.

  As will be described later in other embodiments, display setting data 691, volume setting data 693, and light amount setting data 695 are stored in advance in the storage unit 490 of the data display device 4 and are independent of the hall computer 6. Then, the data display device 4 may perform stand-alone settings relating to display, volume, and amount of light.

  Next, the first display control unit 411 and the second display control unit 412 start executing the display process according to the display processing program 491a stored in the storage unit 490 (B17). The display process is continuously executed until the main process ends.

  Thereafter, the specific sound output control unit 414 starts executing the sound output process (B19). The sound output process is continuously executed until the main process ends.

  In the sound output process, when the specific sound output control unit 414 displays the big hit running video on the first display unit 430 in the display process, the sound or music related to the big hit running video is used as the specific sound from the sound output unit 450. Control to output. Further, when the simultaneous effect video is displayed on the first display unit 430 in the display process, the sound output unit 450 is controlled to output the sound or music of the simultaneous effect video as a specific sound.

  When a big hit occurs in the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4, the first display unit 430 displays a big hit effect screen on which the first display control unit 411 congratulates the big hit in the display processing of B17. In the sound output processing of B19, the specific sound output control unit 414 may output the fanfare sound that congratulates the big hit from the sound output unit 450 as the specific sound. In addition, when it is detected that the clerk's calling operation is performed by the player, the clerk's ringing sound may be output from the sound output unit 450 as a specific sound.

  After performing the sound output process, the sound volume setting unit 416 starts executing the sound volume setting process according to the sound volume setting process program 491c stored in the storage unit 490 (B21). The volume setting process is continuously executed until the main process ends.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not to end the processing (B23). For example, when it is detected that an operation for turning off the power of the data display device 4 is performed, it is determined that the processing is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (B23; No), the process part 410 will wait as it is. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (B23; Yes), the process part 410 will complete | finish a main process.

25 and 26 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of display processing.
First, the processing unit 410 performs an operation determination process for determining whether or not the corresponding pachinko machine 2 is in an operating state (C1). Specifically, as described above, based on the game signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 or the card ejection signal transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5, whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is currently in operation ( Or whether it is currently empty. As a result, if it is determined that it is in operation (not an empty table) (C3; No), the second display control unit 412 sets the operating flag to “OFF” (C4) and sets the empty table information to the first value. Control is performed so as to display on the 2 display section 440 (C6). Then, the process proceeds to C7.

  It is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is in operation, that is, whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is a vacant machine. A game signal transmitted from the pachinko machine 2 or a card discharge transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5 is determined. In addition to the signal, for example, an imaging device (camera) is provided in the pachinko machine 2 to determine whether the player has left due to imaging, and a signal indicating that the player has left the pachinko machine 2 is transmitted. You may determine by doing. In addition, a detection sensor such as an infrared sensor may be provided to transmit a signal indicating that the player has left.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is currently operating (not an empty base) (C3; Yes), the processing unit 410 sets the operating flag to “ON” (C5), and moves the process to C7.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not a game is started on the pachinko machine 2 (C7). The start of the game can be determined, for example, by the fact that the operating flag has changed from OFF to ON. If it is determined that the game has started (C7; Yes), control is performed so as to hide the vacant table information displayed on the second display unit 440 (C9). If it is determined that the game has not started (C7; No), the processing unit 410 shifts the process to C11.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the pachinko machine 2 is playing a game (C11). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 2 is playing a game (C11; Yes), the first processing is performed based on the received game signal. Control to update the display of the display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 is performed (C13). Specifically, based on the game signal received from the pachinko machine 2, the first display control unit 411 updates game data such as the number of big hits and the number of start times displayed on the first display unit 430. Further, the second display control unit 412 updates the display of jackpot information, latent probability variation information, and time reduction information displayed on the second display unit 440. Then, the processing unit 410 moves the process to C15. If it is determined that the pachinko machine 2 is not playing a game (C11; No), the processing unit 410 moves the process to C15.

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the possessed ball number signal has been received from the inter-counter counting unit 5 (C15), and if it is determined that it has been received (C15; Yes), Based on this, the possessed ball number data 497 in the storage unit 490 is updated (C17). Then, the processing unit 410 performs possessed ball special display processing according to the possessed ball special display processing program 491b stored in the storage unit 490 (C19). Then, the process proceeds to C20. If it is determined that the possessed ball number signal has not been received from the inter-counter counting unit 5 (C15; No), the processing unit 410 moves the process to C20.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not a simultaneous effect display instruction signal has been received from the hall computer 6 (C21), and if it is determined that it has been received (C21; Yes), an execution instruction for the big hit running effect is made. It is determined whether or not (C23).

  If it is determined that the execution instruction for the big hit running effect has been made (C23; Yes), the first display control unit 411 performs control to display the big hit running video on the first display unit 430 based on the display setting data 691. Perform (C25). As described above, the display instruction signal for running effect output from the hall computer 6 is delayed by a delay time corresponding to a predetermined time difference. As a result, each data display device 4 causes the first display unit 430 to display the big hit running video with the above time difference, thereby realizing the big hit running effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution instruction for the big hit running effect has not been made (C23; No), the first display control unit 411 displays the simultaneous effect image corresponding to the simultaneous effect display condition included in the simultaneous effect display instruction signal. Control to display on the 1 display unit 430 is performed (C27).

  Next, the first display control unit 411 determines whether or not the simultaneous effect display is to be ended (C29), and if it is determined not to be ended (C29; No), the process proceeds to C37. Moreover, if it determines with complete | finishing (C29; Yes), control which complete | finishes the simultaneous effect display of the 1st display part 430 will be performed (C31). Then, the process proceeds to C37.

  If it is determined in C21 that the simultaneous effect display instruction signal is not received from the hall computer 6 (C21; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether it is the display timing of the version information (C33). The display timing of the version information may be a timing each time a predetermined time elapses, or may be a timing at which it is detected that the version information display icon displayed on the first display unit 430 is tapped by the player or the player. Good. Further, the version information display may be included in the simultaneous effect display, and the version information simultaneous effect display may be performed in synchronization with the simultaneous effect of the pachinko machine 2.

  If it is determined that it is the display timing of the version information (C33; Yes), the first display control unit 411 displays the version information of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 in the first display unit 430. The display is controlled (C35). Here, the version information displayed on the first display unit 430 includes the model name of the pachinko machine 2 and the number of models (series), the normal jackpot probability, the probability variation jackpot probability, the probability variation rush rate, the continuation rate, etc. Information is included. Then, the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to C29.

  After C31, the first display control unit 411 determines whether or not it is the display end timing of the version information (C37). If it is determined that it is not the display end timing (C37; No), the display processing is ended. To do. If it is determined that it is the display end timing (C37; Yes), the first display control unit 411 performs control to end the display of the version information on the first display unit 430 (C39). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the display process.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an exemplary flow of the possessed ball special display process. In this process, the display numbers of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are determined according to the two display counter values of the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and the first predetermined image is determined based on the display number. Control is performed so that the image and the second predetermined image are displayed on the first display unit 430. In this process, “first” is added to the head of the coefficient (parameter value) used for display control and non-display control of the first predetermined image, and the coefficient (parameter value) used for display control and non-display control of the second predetermined image. ) Is preceded by “second”. The first display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the first predetermined image, the second display counter value is a counter value indicating the display number of the second predetermined image, and these are a kind of processing data 499. It is. In the following description, it is assumed that the first display counter value and the second display counter value are initially set to 0.

  First, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 calculates an integer part of the second integer m = [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] (D1). The second integer m is a coefficient used for setting the second display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 499.

  Next, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 calculates the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) (D3). The number of intermediate possessed balls is a coefficient used for setting the first display counter value and the second display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 499.

  Next, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls has reached the second non-display threshold (D5). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possessed balls is the same as the second non-display threshold or exceeds the second non-display threshold.

  If it is determined that the condition is satisfied in D5 (D5; Yes), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the second display counter value is larger than m (D7). If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D7; Yes), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 sets m + 1 as the second display counter value (D9). This means that the latest second display counter value is maintained. The possessed ball special display processing unit 413 then sets the first display counter value to 0 (D11), and then moves the process to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D5 (D5; No), or when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in D7 (D7; No), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 sets m to the second display counter value. Is set (D13). Then, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 calculates the integer part of the first integer n = [number of intermediate possessed balls / first display threshold] (D15). The first integer n is a coefficient used for setting the first display counter value, and is a kind of processing data 499.

  Next, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls− (n × first display threshold) has reached the first non-display threshold (D17). This condition is satisfied when the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold value) is the same as or exceeds the first non-display threshold value. If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (D17; Yes), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n (D21).

  If it is determined in D21 that the condition is satisfied (D21; Yes), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 sets n + 1 as the first display counter value (D23). This means that the latest first display counter value is maintained. Then, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 shifts the processing to D25.

  When it is determined that the condition of D17 is not satisfied (D17; No), or when it is determined that the condition of D21 is not satisfied (D21; No), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 adds n to the first display counter value. Is set (D19).

  Next, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 performs control to display the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 according to the first display counter value (D25). Specifically, the same number of first predetermined images as the first display counter value are displayed on the first display unit 430.

  The possessed ball special display processing unit 413 performs control to display the second predetermined image on the first display unit 430 in accordance with the second display counter value (D27). Specifically, the same number of second predetermined images as the second display counter value are displayed on the first display unit 430. Then, the possessed sphere special display processing unit 413 ends the possessed sphere special display processing.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram of the principle of possessed sphere special display in the possessed sphere special display process. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots, the first non-display threshold is 800 shots, and a dollar box is displayed on the first display unit 430 as a first predetermined image will be described as an example.

  In the above possessed ball special display processing, the first display threshold of 1000 shots is set as one display unit number, and every time the number of possessed balls reaches this display unit number (1000 shots, 2000 shots, 3000 shots,... ) Increase the display of the dollar box by one. Further, the first non-display threshold value of 800 shots is set as one non-display unit number, and every time the predetermined number of balls falls below the non-display unit number (800 shots, 1800 shots, 2800 shots,...) Decrease the display of by 1.

  In the leftmost part of FIG. 28, a case where the number of possessed balls is 1800 is illustrated. Since the number of possessed balls exceeds 1000 which is the number of display units, one dollar box is displayed. Yes. Thereafter, the number of possessed balls increased and the number of possessed balls = 1900 shots. However, since the number of possessed balls has not yet exceeded the display unit number of 2000, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. Thereafter, when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the dollar box is increased by one and displayed.

  Thereafter, the number of possessed balls increased to 2100, but since the number of possessed balls does not exceed the display unit number of 3000, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. After that, it is assumed that the number of possessed balls decreases due to the player paying out the game balls, and the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900. In this case, although the number of possessed balls is less than 2000 which is the number of display units, but is not less than 1800 which is the number of non-display units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged.

  It should be noted that the number of dollar boxes to be displayed differs between the case where the number of possessed balls increases from 1800 to 1900 and the number of possessed balls decreases from 2100 to 1900. Is a point. This means that even if the number of possessed balls is the same, the number of dollar boxes to be displayed may differ depending on whether the number of possessed balls changes in the increasing direction or the decreasing direction. The details will be described later with a specific example.

  Thereafter, the number of possessed balls decreased to 1800 possessed balls, but since the number of possessed balls is not less than 1800 which is the number of non-display units, the display of the dollar box remains unchanged. When the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below 1800, which is the number of non-display units, one dollar box is reduced and one is displayed.

  Next, details of the possessed sphere special display process of FIG. 27 will be described by giving a plurality of specific examples when the possessed sphere numbers are different. In the following description, the process in each step will be described with reference to each step of the possessed ball special display process.

(1) Specific example 1
First, consider a case where the number of possessed balls = 1900.
At D1, the second integer m = [the number of possessed balls / the second display threshold value] = the integer part = [1900/5000]. The integer part = 0 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls- (m × second display threshold) = 1900− (0 × 5000) = 1900 is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 1900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold value. Since the determination result is negative, the process proceeds to D13.

In D13, since m = 0, 0 is set to the second display counter value.
In D15, the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possessed balls / the first display threshold value] = the integer part = [1900/1000] of the integer part = 1 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold value) = 1900− (1 × 1000) = 900 shots has reached the first non-display threshold value of 800 shots. Since affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to D21.

  In D21, it is determined whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 1900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the determination result of D21 is different. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, since the first display counter value = 1 when the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, the value is the same as n = 1. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is negative, and the process proceeds to D19. In D19, n (= 1) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 1 and the second display counter value = 0 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 1, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  On the other hand, if the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000, the first display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, and is larger than n = 1. Become. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D23. In D23, n + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set as the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 0 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 0. .

  From the above example, even if the number of possessed balls is the same 1900, it is displayed when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900 and when the number of possessed balls decreases to 1900 after reaching 2000 It can be seen that the number of first predetermined images differs.

(2) Specific example 2
Next, consider a case where the number of possessed balls is 7900.
In D1, second integer m = integer part of [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] = integer part of [7900/5000] = 1 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 7900− (1 × 5000) = 2900 is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 2900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold value. Since the determination result is negative, the process proceeds to D13.

Since D13 is m = 1, 1 is set to the second display counter value.
In D15, the first integer n = [the number of intermediate possessed balls / first display threshold value] = integer part = [2900/1000] integer part = 2 is calculated.

  In D17, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls- (n × first display threshold) = 2900− (2 × 1000) = 900 has reached 800, which is the first non-display threshold, and this determination result Since affirmative determination is made, the process proceeds to D21.

  In D21, it is determined whether or not the first display counter value is larger than n. Here, since the first display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 7900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 7900 after reaching 8000, the determination result of D21 differs. come.

When the number of possessed balls increases to 7900, the first display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 7000, so the value is the same as n = 2. For this reason, the determination result of D21 is negative, and the process proceeds to D19. In D19, n (= 2) is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 2 and the second display counter value = 1 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 2, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

  On the other hand, when the number of possessed balls has decreased to 7900 after reaching 8000, the first display counter value = 3 when the number of possessed balls reaches 8000, which is larger than n = 2. . For this reason, the determination result of D21 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D23. In D23, n + 1 (= 2 + 1 = 3) is set as the first display counter value. That is, the first display counter value is maintained. As a result, since the first display counter value = 3 and the second display counter value = 1 are finally obtained, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 3, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 1. .

(3) Specific example 3
Next, consider a case where the number of possessed balls is 9900.
In D1, second integer m = integer part of [number of possessed balls / second display threshold value] = integer part of [9900/5000] = 1 is calculated.
In D3, the number of intermediate possessed balls = the number of possessed balls− (m × second display threshold) = 9900 shots− (1 × 5000) = 4900 shots is calculated.
In D5, it is determined whether or not the number of intermediate possessed balls = 4900 has reached 4600, which is the second non-display threshold. Since this determination result is affirmative, the process moves to D7.

  In D7, it is determined whether or not the second display counter value is larger than m. Here, since the second display counter value is different between the case where the number of possessed balls increases to 9900 and the number of possessed balls decreases to 9900 after reaching 10,000, the determination result of D7 differs. come.

  When the number of possessed balls increases to 9900, the second display counter value = 1 when the possessed number of balls reaches 5000, so the same value as m = 1. For this reason, the determination result of D7 is negative, and the process is transferred to D13. In D13, m (= 1) is set as the second display counter value.

  On the other hand, when the number of possessed balls has decreased to 9900 after reaching 10,000, the second display counter value = 2 when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, which is larger than m = 1. Become. For this reason, the determination result of D7 is affirmative, and the process proceeds to D9. At D9, m + 1 (= 1 + 1 = 2) is set as the second display counter value. That is, the second display counter value is maintained. In D11, 0 is set to the first display counter value. As a result, since the first display counter value = 0 and the second display counter value = 2 finally, the display number of the first predetermined image in D25 is 0, and the display number of the second predetermined image in D27 is 2. .

  As described above, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the player keeps the counting lever 341 pulled, and the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 are moved from the lower plate 24 to the counting passage 343 at any time. When the player increases the number of times by counting and the game ball discharged from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341, the game ball is stored in the lower plate 24 to a certain extent. There are two cases, that is, when the accumulated game balls flow into the counting passage 343 at a stroke by counting the counting lever 341 at the accumulated stage and are counted at a stretch.

  The latter case (when the number of possessed balls increases at a stretch) is particularly problematic. As described above, since the data display device 4 receives the possessed ball number signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 at intermittent timing, the number of possessed balls specified from the possessed ball number signal received at one timing, There may be a large difference between the number of possessed spheres identified from the possessed sphere number signal received at this timing. Specifically, by storing the game balls that the player wins during the big hit until the lower plate 24 is full, a large number of game balls are counted at a time, and the number of possessed balls is, for example, 1000 There is a case where it increases at a time in a numerical range such as from departure to 2000. In this case, since the first display threshold is 1000 shots, there may be a case where the number of possessed balls increases across two or three first display thresholds at a time.

  Assuming such a case, in the above possessed ball special display processing, two integers of the first integer n and the second integer m are calculated, and the first display counter value and the second display counter are calculated using these integers. The value is set. Thereby, it is possible to always display a correct number of predetermined images regardless of the degree of increase in the number of possessed balls (degree of increase).

  The display counter values (first display counter and second display counter value) are coefficients for specifying the display stage of the predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image), and the display stage is increased by one stage. It is a counter value that increases by 1 every time. Instead of storing such a display counter value, a display flag having a certain number of possessed balls as a reference number of game media may be set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on the display flag.

  Specifically, a value obtained by adding the first non-display threshold value to an integer multiple of the first display threshold value can be used as the reference game medium number, and a display flag for the reference game medium number can be set. For example, if the first display threshold is 1000 and the first non-display threshold is 800, 800, 1800, 2800,... Set the flag. Specifically, “1” is set in the display flag every time the number of possessed balls increases to reach an integral multiple of the first display threshold. Each time the number of possessed balls increases to reach the reference number of game media or the number of possessed balls decreases and falls below the reference number of game media, “0” is set in the display flag. Based on this display flag and the number of possessed balls, the display number of the predetermined image is determined.

  A case where the reference number of game media is 1800 is described. As described above, for example, when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the display number of the first predetermined image is 1, and after the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the number decreases to 1900. In this case, the display number of the first predetermined image needs to be two. Therefore, when the number of possessed balls increases and reaches 1800, the display flag is set to “0”, and when the number of possessed balls increases to reach 2000, the display flag is set to “1”. In this case, even if the number of possessed balls is reduced from 2000, the display flag remains set to “1” unless the number is less than 1800, which is the reference number of game media. In other words, when the number of possessed balls increases to 1900, the display flag is set to “0”, whereas when the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, the number decreases to 1900. Means that the display flag is set to “1”. Therefore, based on the fact that the number of possessed balls is one thousand, the display number of the first predetermined image is determined as 1 in the former case, and the display number of the first predetermined image is determined as 2 in the latter case. can do.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of volume setting processing.
The volume setting unit 416 determines whether the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 has changed (M1). For example, the volume setting unit 416 specifies the current channel based on the signal output from the setting changeover switch 460 and sequentially stores data indicating the specified channel in a predetermined area of the storage unit 490. For example, a ring buffer can be configured in the storage unit 490, data for a predetermined number of channels can be stored, and the data can be sequentially updated from the oldest one. Then, the latest channel stored in the ring buffer is compared with the previous channel, and if they are different, it is determined that the channel has changed.

  If it is determined that the channel has not changed (M1; No), the volume etc. setting unit 416 moves the process to M9. On the other hand, if it is determined that the channel has changed (M1; Yes), the volume setting unit 416 determines whether or not the channel to be changed is any one of “A” to “F” (M3). .

  If it is determined that the channel to be changed is any one of “A” to “F” (M3; Yes), the processing unit 410 performs the second volume stage and the second light quantity stage by a visitor such as a player. The setting restriction of the second volume level or the like for restricting (regulating) the setting is started (M5). In this case, the volume and the light amount are set only based on the volume level (first volume level and first light level) based on the channel state.

  Next, the volume setting unit 416 performs setting processing for setting the first volume and the first light amount according to the volume setting data 693 stored in the storage unit 490 according to the change contents of the channel (M7). Specifically, the stage corresponding to the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is set as the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage, and the volume and the light quantity according to the set first volume stage and the first light quantity stage are actually set. Set as volume and light intensity. For example, if the channel is “A”, “A” is set as the first volume level and the first light level, the actual volume is set to “2”, and the actual light level is set to “30%”. The same applies when the channel is another channel. With the setting of the first volume level and the first light quantity level, sound output and light emission are subsequently executed with the set volume and light quantity.

Here, the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 only needs to be identified by the channel stored in the storage unit 490 in M1. Further, “setting” means that the channel state of the setting changeover switch 460 is stored in a predetermined area of the storage unit 490 and processing can be performed based on this. As will be described later, when priority is given to the setting by the hall computer 6, the channel setting transmitted from the hall computer 6 is stored in a predetermined area of the storage unit 490 so that processing can be performed based on this. Say that.
Note that the timing for storing the information to be set in the predetermined area of the storage unit 490 may be limited to a predetermined period from when the power is turned on.

  If it is determined in M3 that the channel to be changed is not “A” to “F”, that is, “0” to “9” (M3; No), the volume setting unit 416, the second volume level, etc. It is determined whether the setting is being restricted (M4). If it is determined that the second volume level etc. setting is not being restricted (M4; No), the volume etc. setting unit 416 moves the process to M7.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the second volume level etc. setting is being restricted (M4; Yes), the volume etc. setting unit 416 cancels the second volume level etc. setting restriction (M6). As a result, the volume level and the light level are determined according to the volume level (first volume level and first light level level) based on the channel state, and the volume level (second volume level and second light level level) based on the change operation of the player or the like. It will be set based on. Then, the volume etc. setting unit 416 moves the process to M7.

  Next, the sound volume setting unit 416 determines whether or not a sound volume change screen display operation has been detected (M9). For example, when the touch panel 421 of the operation unit 420 is tapped, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an instruction operation to display a volume change screen. If it determines with having detected (M9; Yes), the volume etc. setting part 416 will perform the volume etc. change screen display process which displays the volume etc. change screen on the 1st display part 430 (M11). If it is determined that it has not been detected (M9; No), the volume setting unit 416 moves the process to M25.

  The volume etc. change screen is a display screen for the player to change the volume / light quantity, and can be displayed, for example, by a pop-up display so as to be superimposed on the currently displayed display screen. On the volume change screen, the initial display volume and the initial display light amount corresponding to the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 are highlighted by displaying them in a display mode different from the display of the other volume and the light amount display. . Specifically, for example, the volume of the initial display and the light quantity of the initial display are highlighted by, for example, reversing and displaying an icon indicating the volume so as to be distinguished from other display colors of the volume and the light quantity.

  In this case, the display of the sound volume and the light amount can be executed based on the sound volume setting data 693 in FIG. 14 and the light amount setting data 695 in FIG. For example, if the channel is “0”, a volume change screen that is highlighted with an initial display volume of “2” and an initial display light amount of “30%” is displayed in a predetermined display area of the first display unit 430. Also, for example, if the channel is “5”, a volume change screen highlighted with an initial display volume of “10” and an initial display light amount of “50%” is displayed in a predetermined display area of the first display unit 430. Let Also, for example, if the channel is “9”, a volume change screen that is highlighted with an initial display volume of “14” and an initial display light amount of “100%” is displayed in a predetermined display area of the first display unit 430. Let

  When the second volume setting or the like is limited in M5, the volume etc. setting unit 416 displays a volume / light quantity change icon on the first display unit 430 in order to limit the display of the volume etc. changing screen. It is only necessary to limit the change in volume / light quantity by the store visitor by preventing the display.

  Next, the volume setting unit 416 determines whether a volume change operation has been detected (M13). For example, when the touch panel 421 of the operation unit 420 is tapped, it is determined whether or not an operation for instructing a change in volume has been performed by the player. If it determines with having detected (M13; Yes), the process part 410 will perform a volume change process according to the volume change process program 491d memorize | stored in the memory | storage part 490 (M15). If it is determined that it has not been detected (M13; No), the sound volume setting unit 416 moves the process to M25.

  Next, the volume setting unit 416 determines whether or not a light amount change operation is detected (M17). For example, when the touch panel 421 of the operation unit 420 is tapped, it is determined whether or not an operation for instructing a change in the amount of light has been performed by the player. If it determines with having detected (M17; Yes), the process part 410 will perform a light quantity change process according to the light quantity change process program 491e memorize | stored in the memory | storage part 490 (M19). If it is determined that it has not been detected (M17; No), the sound volume setting unit 416 moves the process to M25.

  In the light amount changing process, the light amount changing unit 418 changes the light amount of the highlighted display on the volume etc. changing screen (M21). That is, the light amount to be highlighted is changed from the currently highlighted light amount in accordance with the player's change operation. Then, the light amount changing unit 418 sets the light amount according to the currently set channel and the highlighted light amount (M23). That is, the currently set channel is specified, and the amount of light corresponding to the specified channel and the highlighted amount of light is set as the amount of light emitted from the first display unit 430 or the light emitting unit 455.

  Note that a confirmation sound may be output in order to notify that the amount of light has been changed (including the fact that it has been maintained despite the operation). Further, notification may be performed by turning on or blinking an effect lamp or a decoration LED instead of or in addition to the confirmation sound. The amount of light at this time is a set amount of light (in the case of a change in the amount of light, this allows confirmation of the changed amount of light). If the highest level is maintained despite the operation, the maximum light amount may be output. If the minimum level is maintained despite the operation, it may be output with the minimum amount of light. May be done.) Note that the light emitter for notification may be provided exclusively for the notification. Thereby, the notification can be performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, the volume etc. setting unit 416 determines whether or not the volume etc. change screen is being displayed on the first display unit 430 (M25), and if it is determined that it is being displayed (M25; Yes), the volume It is determined whether or not an equal change screen display end operation has been detected (M27). For example, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an instruction operation to end the display of the sound volume change screen via the touch panel 421 of the operation unit 420.

  If it determines with having detected (M27; Yes), the volume etc. setting part 416 will perform control which complete | finishes the display of the volume etc. change screen currently displayed (M29). Then, the volume setting unit 416 ends the volume setting process. If it is determined that the volume etc. change screen is not being displayed (M25; No), or if it is determined that the instruction operation for ending the display of the volume etc. change screen has not been made (M27; No), the volume etc. setting unit In step S416, the sound volume setting process is terminated.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the volume changing process.
The processing unit 410 determines whether or not the confirmation sound output timer is counting (N1). The confirmation sound output timer is a timer that is counted when a confirmation sound is output from the sound output unit 450. For example, the clock unit 465 can function as a confirmation sound output timer. That is, the clock unit 465 functions not only as clock means but also as time measuring means.

  Note that the timer value of the confirmation sound output timer is set in advance according to the output time of the confirmation sound. In addition, the timer value of the confirmation sound output timer may not be the same as the output time of the confirmation sound, may be a little longer than the output time of the confirmation sound, or may be a slightly shorter time Good. Further, the output time of the confirmation sound may be different depending on the output sound volume. In this case, the timer value of the confirmation sound output timer corresponding to the output time of each confirmation sound is the timer count. Set at the start of

  If it is determined that the confirmation sound output timer is not counting (N1; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the operation is a change operation outside the range on the maximum volume side (N3). If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (N3; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 outputs the confirmation sound such as the maximum sound effect sound or the voice sound corresponding to the currently set channel. The output unit 450 is controlled to start (N5). And the process part 410 starts the timer count of the timer during confirmation sound output (N17). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the sound volume changing process.

  If it is determined in N3 that the operation is not a change operation outside the range on the maximum volume side (N3; No), the processing unit 410 determines whether the operation is a change operation outside the range on the minimum variable side (N7). ). If it is determined that this condition is satisfied (N7; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 outputs a confirmation sound such as a sound effect with a minimum volume or a sound voice according to the currently set channel. Control is made to start from the output unit 350 (N9). Then, the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to N17.

  If it is determined in N7 that the change operation is not outside the range on the minimum volume side (N7; No), the volume change unit 417 changes the highlighted volume based on the operation content (N11). Specifically, the volume changing unit 417 changes the latest volume set by the volume etc. setting unit 416 based on the operation content of the change operation, and displays an image such as an icon corresponding to the volume specified by the change operation. Control to highlight.

  Next, the volume setting unit 416 sets a volume corresponding to the channel and the highlighted volume (N13). Specifically, the volume setting unit 416 sets the volume level corresponding to the currently set channel and the highlighted volume as the second volume level based on the volume setting data 693.

  Next, the confirmation sound output control unit 415 confirms a confirmation sound corresponding to the current channel and the highlighted volume, that is, a confirmation sound such as a sound effect or a voice voice corresponding to the second volume level set in N13. The sound output unit 450 is controlled to start output (N15). Then, the processing unit 410 shifts the processing to N17.

  In N17, the processing unit 410 starts the timer count of the confirmation sound output timer (N17). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the sound volume changing process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in N1 that the confirmation sound output timer is counting (N1; Yes), the processing unit 410 updates the subtraction sound output timer by subtracting “1” (N19). Then, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the confirmation sound outputting timer has expired (N21).

  If it is determined that the confirmation sound output timer has not timed up (N21; No), the processing unit 410 ends the volume changing process. If it is determined that the time is up (N21; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 controls to stop outputting the confirmation sound being output from the sound output unit 450 (N23). Then, the processing unit 410 ends the sound volume changing process.

  In the above volume change processing, first, it is determined whether the confirmation sound output timer is counting or not, thereby invalidating the operation for changing the volume performed while the confirmation sound is being output. Thus, it is possible to prevent the volume change unintended by the player or the like from being performed when the player or the like continuously operates in a short period of time. Also, if you try to further lower the volume that is currently at the lowest level, output a confirmation sound according to the volume that is at the lowest level, and if you want to increase the volume that is currently at the highest level, Since a confirmation sound corresponding to the highest volume is output, the player or the like can grasp that the operation is performed outside the range where the volume can be set.

  By such a series of processes, a change in volume and light amount is realized. For example, if the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is changed from “0” to “9” during the game, the change of the channel is reflected when the volume / light quantity change screen) is displayed. The first volume level and the first light level corresponding to the subsequent channel are set, and the volume / light level is changed according to the first volume level, the first light level, the initial display volume, and the initial display light level.

  When the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is changed from “A” to “F”, the change is immediately reflected. That is, the first volume level and the first light intensity level corresponding to the changed channel are set immediately. Furthermore, whenever the second volume level or the second light level step in the setting screen is changed by an operation on the operation unit 420, the light amount or volume is changed each time, and when the light amount is changed, the changed light amount is changed. Thus, the first display unit 430 and the light emitting unit 455 such as an effect lamp and a decoration LED emit light.

  With such a configuration, the stage of the initial display volume and the initial display light quantity (the initial display of the second volume stage and the second light quantity stage) is the channel state of the setting changeover switch 460 (the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage). Since the channel state of the setting changeover switch 460 is related to the second volume level and the second light quantity level, the store visitor including the player can change the channel of the setting changeover switch 460. Easy to grasp the condition.

  In addition, since the second volume level and the second light level that are actually displayed are unlikely to be the same even though the first volume level and the first light level are different, the actual volume and light level are less likely to be mistaken, The volume and the amount of light can be adjusted suitably. Also, since the initial display volume and the initial display light amount are different between when the first volume level and the first light level are at the highest level and when at the lowest level, the actual volume and light level are misidentified. It is difficult to adjust the volume and light amount.

  In addition, when the initial display volume and the initial display light amount are other than the highest level in the first volume level and the first light level level, the second volume level (“2” to “14”) other than the highest level and the second light level level ( “50%”, “75%”, “100%”) and the second volume level (“14”), which is the highest level when the first volume level or the first light intensity level is the highest level. Or the second light quantity stage (“100%”), the actual sound volume and light quantity are less likely to be mistaken, and the sound volume and light quantity can be suitably adjusted. Also, with this configuration, the volume and the amount of light do not become larger than the settings on the store side. Therefore, the store side can maximize the first volume level and the first light level step to output an unintentionally loud sound or be bright. Lighting with light can be prevented.

  When the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is changed, the first volume level and the first light level are set (changed) for the first time when the setting screen is displayed, and the actual volume and light level are reflected. Unintended timing (the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage cannot normally be set by the player, so even if the first volume stage or the first light quantity stage is changed, the player desires the volume and light quantity before the change. The volume and light quantity are prevented from being changed (the player intends to change the volume and light quantity by displaying the setting screen, so there is little inconvenience even if the volume or light quantity is changed at this time) ).

  When the first volume level is increased, the initial display volume is also increased. Therefore, the relationship between the first volume level and the second volume level can be easily grasped, so that the volume can be adjusted suitably. Since the initial display light amount increases as the first light amount step increases, the relationship between the first light amount step and the second light amount step can be easily grasped, so that the light amount can be suitably adjusted. In addition, since the confirmation sound is output when the second volume level is set, the setting can be confirmed even with the sound at the second volume level, so that the volume can be adjusted appropriately. Since “A” to “F” for restricting the adjustment of the player's volume and light amount are prepared as the channel of the setting changeover switch 460, the player's volume setting and light amount setting can be restricted, and the game store intends Sound output at a volume that is not possible can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, even if the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is changed during the game, the change is reflected when the setting screen is displayed. However, when the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is changed. In addition, the timing at which the change is reflected may be limited to a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. By doing in this way, only the person concerned in the store who can operate the setting changeover switch 460 within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, that is, within the period, may be able to operate the setting changeover switch 460.

[1-7-3. Inter-counter counting unit processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the inter-unit counting unit processing executed by the processing unit 510 of the inter-unit counting unit 5 in accordance with the inter-unit counting unit processing program 521 stored in the ROM 520.

  First, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not a possession card has been inserted by the player (E1), and if it is determined that it has been inserted (E1; Yes), the possession card from the possession card R / W 570 is determined. Card information is acquired (E3). The number of possessed balls included in the acquired card information is stored in the RAM 530 as possessed ball number data 531 (E5). When it is determined that the holding card has not been inserted (E1; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to E7.

  Next, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not the ticketing button 551 has been pressed by the player (E7). If it is determined that the player has pressed the ticketing button 551 (E7; Yes), the ball card issuing process for issuing the ball card is issued. (E9). Specifically, control is performed to write the card information 533 in which the possession ball number indicated by the possession ball number data 531 stored in the RAM 530 is associated with the possession card R / W 570 to the possession card, Control is performed to cause the holding card insertion / discharge section 565 to discharge the holding card. If it is determined that the ticketing button 551 has not been pressed (E7; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to E11.

  Next, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not the payout button 552 is pressed by the player (E11). If it is determined that the player has pressed the button (E11; Yes), the ball payout process is performed (E13). Specifically, control is performed so that the counting-out unit 380 causes the player to pay out a predetermined number (125 shots) of game balls. Then, the processing unit 510 updates the possessed ball number data 531 in the RAM 530 (E15). If it is determined that the payout button 552 has not been pressed (E11; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to E17.

  Next, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not the counting result is input from the counting payout unit 380 (E17), and if it is determined that it is input (E17; Yes), the possessed ball number data 531 in the RAM 530 is updated. (E19). If it is determined that the count result has not been input (E17; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to E21.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not it is the output timing of the possessed ball number signal (E21). If it is determined that it is the output timing (E21; Yes), control is performed to output the possessed ball number signal to the data display device 4 (E23). If it is determined that it is not the output timing of the possessed ball number signal (E21; No), the processing unit 510 moves the process to E25.

  Thereafter, the processing unit 510 determines whether or not to end the processing (E25). If it determines with continuing a process (E25; No), the process part 510 will return a process to E1. On the other hand, if it determines with complete | finishing a process (E25; Yes), the process part 510 will complete | finish a unit counting unit process.

[1-8. Display screen]
[1-8-1. Display screen example of the first display unit]
With reference to FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, the display screen displayed on the 1st display part 430 of the data display apparatus 4 is demonstrated.

  FIG. 32 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the game data screen displayed on the first display unit 430. In the upper part of the game data screen, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 is displayed. Below that is the number of big hits, the number of starts, the number of probable big hits, the normal number of big hits, the number of big hits the day before, the number of big hits the day before, and the special display for possession balls, respectively in the display window provided individually Is displayed.

  In addition, a call icon, a service icon, a volume / light quantity change icon, and a version information icon are displayed at the bottom of the first display unit 430. The player can call the store clerk by tapping the call icon with a finger. Further, the player can select a service by tapping the service icon with a finger. When the service icon is tapped with a finger, the display is switched to a service selection screen (not shown), and it is possible to select provision of various services (wagon service, hand towel, meal break, etc.). Further, the player can display the version information of the pachinko machine 2 on the first display unit 430 by tapping the version information icon.

  When the player taps the volume / light quantity change icon with his / her finger, as shown in FIG. 32 (2), a volume change screen for changing the volume / light quantity pops up on the game data screen.

  The change screen for volume etc. in FIG. 32 (2) is an example of a display screen when “5” is set as the channel of the setting changeover switch 460. As shown in the volume setting data 693 in FIG. 14, when the channel “5” is set, “10” is highlighted as the initial display volume. Also, as shown in the light quantity setting data 695 in FIG. 15, when “5” of the channel is set, “50%” is highlighted as the initial display light quantity. The same applies to subsequent volume change screens.

  Specifically, on the volume change screen of FIG. 32 (2), a volume icon is displayed as a volume change screen in which numbers from “2” to “14” are displayed in black. The volume icon is a white round icon that increases in size as the hollow number increases, and the currently selected volume icon is reversed from white to black, It is highlighted in white. In the initial display, the volume icon “10” is highlighted.

  The player can change the volume by tapping the triangular volume changing icons displayed on the left and right parts of the volume icon. When a tap operation for tapping the volume changing icon is performed, the volume is moved one by one to the left and right, and accordingly, the volume icon corresponding to the volume to be changed is highlighted. Then, a sound for confirming the volume corresponding to the volume of the change destination is output from the sound output unit 450.

  More specifically, the icon displayed on the left side of the volume icon “2” is a low volume change icon for changing the volume in the direction of decreasing the volume, and is displayed on the right side of the volume icon “14”. The icon is a high volume change icon for changing the volume in the direction of increasing the volume.

  When the low volume change icon is tapped while the volume icon of “2” is highlighted, it is determined that the volume change operation has been performed outside the range on the minimum volume side, and the predetermined range (“2” to “ The confirmation sound of the volume “2”, which is the lower limit volume of the “14” volume changeable range), is output from the sound output unit 450. Further, when the high volume change icon is tapped while the volume icon of “14” is highlighted, it is determined that the volume change operation is performed outside the range on the maximum volume side, and a predetermined range (“2”) is determined. Sound confirmation unit 450 outputs a confirmation sound of the volume of “14”, which is the larger limit volume of the volume changeable range of “14”.

  A light amount change screen for changing the light amount is displayed below the volume change screen. On the light amount change screen, three light amount selection icons “50%”, “75%”, and “100%” are displayed. The light intensity selection icon is a white rectangular icon with a black “%” number indicating the light intensity, and the light intensity selection icon corresponding to the currently set light intensity is displayed in black. , Hollow numbers are highlighted in white and highlighted. In the initial display, the light quantity selection icon of “50%” is highlighted. The player can change the light amount by tapping the light amount selection icon corresponding to the light amount desired to be changed with a finger.

FIG. 33 (1) shows another example of the game data screen.
In the game data screen, the model name of the pachinko machine 2 provided corresponding to the data display device 4 is displayed at the top of the screen, as in FIG. 32 (1). Below that, the number of big hits, the number of starts, the number of probable big hits, the number of normal big hits, the number of big hits the previous day, and the number of big hits the day before are displayed in their respective display windows. ing. Unlike the game data screen of FIG. 32 (1), the possessed ball special display is not displayed on this game data screen. In addition, a call icon, a service icon, and a menu icon are displayed at the bottom of the game data screen. When the menu icon is tapped with a finger, the display is switched to the menu screen shown in FIG.

FIG. 33B is a diagram illustrating an example of the menu screen.
In the center of the menu screen, a display screen selection icon for the player to select a display screen, a display customization icon for the player to customize display, and a player for changing the volume / light quantity The volume / light quantity change icon is displayed. When the display screen selection icon is tapped by the player, the display screen is switched to a display screen selection screen (not shown). Further, when the display customization icon is tapped by the player, the display screen is switched to a display customization screen (not shown).

  When the volume / light quantity change icon is tapped by the player, the display screen is switched to a volume etc. change screen as shown in FIG. The volume etc. change screen is the same as the volume etc. change screen shown in FIG. 32 (2), and is composed of a volume change screen for changing the volume and a light quantity change screen for changing the light quantity. Yes.

[1-8-2. Example of display screen on second display]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 34 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the vacancy information screen.
On this vacancy information screen, vacancy information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is vacant is displayed. Specifically, a message “Available now” is displayed along with a message “vacant” in the center of the screen. By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is currently empty and can be played.

FIG. 34 (2) is a diagram showing an example of the big hit middle screen.
The jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is jackpot is displayed on the jackpot screen. Specifically, a flame is displayed at the center of the screen, and a “big hit” message indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in big hit is displayed. By this message, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is currently in big hit.

FIG. 34 (3) is a diagram showing an example of a latent probability changing screen.
On this latent probability changing screen, latent probability changing information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latent probability is displayed at the center of the screen. Specifically, a jagged balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a message “latency probability changing” is displayed therein. In addition, a message “Now is a chance !!” is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  Since the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the player's game position, the player cannot know that the latent probability is being changed. On the other hand, the player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latent probability by looking at the second display unit 440. That is, the viewing player knows that the stand is in a chance state, but the player continues playing without knowing that the stand is in a chance state. Also, if a player leaves the game without knowing that the latent probability is changing, the surrounding players know that the stand is in a chance state, so they sit on the stand and play the game. You can expect a big hit by doing it. As a result, a new interest that cannot be realized by the conventional call lamp device can be created.

FIG. 34 (4) is a diagram showing an example of a time-short / medium screen.
At this time short and medium screen, time short time information indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is short in time is displayed at the center of the screen. Specifically, a cloud-like balloon is displayed at the center of the screen, and a “short time” message is displayed therein. At the bottom of the screen, a message saying “Sorry.

  Since the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the player's game position, the player cannot know that the time is short. On the other hand, the watching game player can know that the pachinko machine 2 is short in time and has a low possibility of making a big hit by looking at the second display unit 440.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of the possessed sphere special display displayed on the first display unit 430. FIG. 35 shows how the display of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image changes according to the number of balls possessed by the player. Here, a case where a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image is illustrated. Further, the description will be made assuming that the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 5000 shots.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one dollar box is displayed (dollar box first display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box second display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000, three dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box third display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, four dollar boxes are displayed (dollar box 4th Display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the display number of the dollar box becomes 5, but the display condition of the special box is satisfied, so the display of all dollar boxes is hidden and one special box is displayed. (Special box first display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 6000, the number of possessed balls has increased by 1000 on the basis of 5000, so one dollar box is displayed and one special box is displayed (dollar box first display stage & special box First display stage).
Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9,000, four dollar boxes and one special box are displayed (dollar box fourth display stage & special box first display stage).

When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the number of dollar boxes displayed will be 5, but since the special box display conditions are met, all dollar box displays will be hidden and one special box will be added. Then, two special boxes are displayed (special box second display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, the number of possessed balls has increased by 1000 on the basis of 10,000, so one dollar box is displayed and two special boxes are displayed (dollar box first display stage & special Box second display stage).
The same applies to the following. For example, when the number of possessed balls reaches 15000, three special boxes are displayed (special box third display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the dollar box (first predetermined image) is increased by one for every 1000 balls possessed, but when the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the dollar box (first predetermined image) is increased. The special box (second predetermined image) is newly displayed with the display of (image) hidden.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 5000, the displayed dollar box (first predetermined image) is not hidden and the display of the dollar box (first predetermined image) is continued. A box (second predetermined image) may be newly displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the possessed ball special display displayed on the first display unit 430. Here, the case where a ball of game balls loaded in a thousand carton box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a carousel box is displayed as the second predetermined image is shown. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 10,000 shots is illustrated.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one stage of the game ball is displayed on the thousand car boxes (the first car box display stage of the thousand car boxes). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand-yen box (the second two-ball display stage of the thousand-yen box). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000 shots, 3 stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes (the third car ball display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000, 4 stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand car boxes. (Thousands box fourth ball volume display stage).

  Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9000, nine stages of game balls are displayed in the thousand-thousand boxes (the nine-thousand-box ninth ball display stage). And if the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be 10 tiers, but since no more game balls can be stacked in the thousand car boxes, all the ball capacity of the thousand car boxes will be cleared, One box is displayed (the first display stage of both boxes).

  Thereafter, when the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one stage of game balls is displayed in the thousand boxes, and one box is displayed (one thousand boxes first ball-bulk display stage & both boxes first display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 19000, nine game balls are displayed in a thousand boxes, and one box is displayed (thousand boxes 9th ball display stage & both boxes first display stage) ). And when the number of possessed balls reaches 20000, the ball capacity of the thousand boxes will be 10 tiers, but since no more game balls can be stacked in the thousand boxes, all the balls of the thousand boxes are cleared, One box is added, and two boxes are displayed (second box for both boxes).

  In this example of the display screen, the display of the ball capacity (first predetermined image) of a thousand boxes is increased by one for every 1000 balls, but when the number of possession balls reaches 10,000, the ball capacity of the thousand boxes is increased. The (first predetermined image) is not displayed, and both boxes (second predetermined image) are newly displayed.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, the displayed ball capacity (first predetermined image) of the thousand boxes is not hidden, and the display of the ball capacity (first predetermined image) of the thousand boxes is continued. In this case, a new box (second predetermined image) may be displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the possessed sphere special display displayed on the first display unit 430. Here, the case where the ball bulk of a game ball stacked in one ball box is displayed as the first predetermined image, and the ball bulk of a game ball stacked in another ball box as the second predetermined image is shown. Here, a case where the first display threshold is 1000 shots and the second display threshold is 10,000 shots is illustrated.

  When the number of possessed balls reaches 1000, one stage of game balls is displayed in the first box (first ball volume display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 2000, two stages of game balls are displayed in the first box (second ball volume display stage). Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 3000 shots, 3 stages of game balls are displayed in the first box (third ball-bulk display stage), and when the number of possessed balls reaches 4000 shots, games are played in the first box. Four spheres are displayed (fourth ball display stage).

  Similarly, when the number of possessed balls reaches 9000, 9 stages of game balls are displayed in the first box (the 9th ball display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, ten stages of game balls are displayed in the first box. At this time, since no more game balls can be stacked in the first box, the second box is displayed (tenth ball display stage).

  The same applies to the following. When the number of possessed balls reaches 11,000, one stage of game balls is displayed in the second box (the eleventh ball display stage). When the number of possessed balls reaches 20000, 10 game balls are displayed in the second box. At this time, since no more game balls can be stacked in the second box, the third box is displayed (the 20th ball display stage).

  In this display screen example, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box is incremented by one for every 1000 balls possessed, and when the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000, The display of the ball volume (first predetermined image) of the stacked ball box is left as it is (continue), and the ball volume (second predetermined image) of the next ball box is newly displayed.

  In addition, when the increase in the number of possessed balls reaches 10,000 shots, the display of the ball bulk (first predetermined image) of the ball box stacked first is not continued, and the ball bulk of the ball box stacked first ( The first predetermined image) may be hidden and the ball volume (second predetermined image) of the next ball box may be newly displayed. That is, when displaying the second predetermined image, the first predetermined image may be hidden or the display of the first predetermined image may be continued.

[1-9. Effect]
In the first gaming system 1A, in correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 which is a kind of gaming machine using a game ball which is a kind of gaming medium, the data display device 4 which is a kind of gaming apparatus and information display apparatus. Is provided.

  The data display device 4 is set by an operation unit 420 having a touch panel 421, a sound output unit 450, a volume setting unit 416 for setting the volume of a specific sound output from the sound output unit 450, and a volume setting unit 416. Corresponding to the volume set by the volume setting unit 416 after the operation is performed when the operation unit 420 is operated, and the volume changing unit 417 that changes the volume according to the operation of the operation unit 420. A confirmation sound output control unit 415 that outputs a confirmation sound from the sound output unit 450. The volume setting unit 416 can set the volume within a volume changeable range included in the volume setting data 693, and the confirmation sound output control unit 415 changes the volume set by the volume etc. setting unit 416. When the operation unit 420 is operated to change the volume outside the limit of the volume changeable range when the volume is within the limit of the possible range, a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume of the limit of the volume changeable range Is output from the sound output unit 450.

  According to this, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed in the data display device 4, a confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the limit volume exceeding the predetermined range is output. It is possible to make a store visitor including a player recognize that it is going to change the volume beyond the range.

  Further, when the confirmation sound output timer is counting in the volume changing process, that is, during the output of the confirmation sound, the processing unit 410 disables the operation for changing the volume, thereby continuously operating the operation unit. When the above operation is performed, it is possible to prevent an unintended volume setting from being performed by a customer. In the present embodiment, during the output of the confirmation sound, the confirmation sound is not output and the highlighting is not changed.

  In the present embodiment, the data display device 4 is performed when the first permission condition for the store where the data display device 4 is installed is satisfied (when the setting changeover switch 460 is in an operable state). Based on the first operation (channel switching operation of the setting changeover switch 460), the first setting means (volume etc. setting unit 416) for setting any one of a plurality of steps as the first volume level, and the pachinko machine 2 Based on the second operation (operation on the operation unit 420) performed when the second permission condition for the customer including the player to play is satisfied (when the volume change screen is displayed). Second setting means (volume setting unit 416) for setting any one of the stages as the second volume level.

  In addition, the data display device 4 includes a specific sound output control unit 414 that outputs a specific sound having a volume corresponding to the first volume level and the second volume level set by the volume setting unit 416 from the sound output unit 450. The first display control unit 411 displays a stage display (here, an image in which one of the plurality of volume stages is highlighted as the second volume stage) indicating the second volume stage when the second operation is performed. Control to be displayed on the first display unit 430 is performed. In addition, the first display control unit 411 displays the first step display so that the initial display of the step display displayed on the first display unit 430 differs depending on the first volume step set by the volume setting unit 416. It is displayed on the display unit 430.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the initial display of the stage display when displaying the stage display is different depending on whether the first volume stage set by the first setting means is the highest stage or the lowest stage. The stage display is displayed.

  When the first volume level is other than the highest level and the lowest level, the initial display may be the same, or the initial display may be the same for a plurality of levels of the first volume level. Even in such a case, at the time of the highest level and the lowest level, at least misidentification of the volume is not easily recognized, and the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the initial display of the stage display when displaying the stage display is the second volume stage other than the highest stage when the first volume stage set by the first setting means is other than the highest stage. In addition, when the first volume level is the highest level, a stage display is displayed so as to indicate the second volume level that is the highest level.

  The initial display may be the same when the first volume level is other than the highest level, or the initial display may be the same for a plurality of levels of the first volume level. Even in such a case, at the highest stage, at least the misunderstanding of the volume is not easily misidentified, and the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  “Specific sound output control means for outputting a specific sound having a sound volume corresponding to the first sound volume level set by the first setting means and the second sound volume level set by the second setting means from a sound output unit. ”May output a specific sound having a volume corresponding to both the first volume level and the second volume level each time a specific sound is output, or during a first period (for example, the first sound level). After the setting, during the period before the second setting), a specific sound having a volume corresponding to at least the first volume level is output, and during the second period (for example, during the period after the second setting), at least the second volume level A specific sound with a corresponding volume may be output.

  For example, when the actual volume does not depend on the channel (first volume level) of the setting changeover switch 460, the normal volume (for example, when the second operation is performed) is not based on the first volume level, The volume is set according to the two volume levels, and when the first volume level is set (for example, the setting limit state when the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 is “A” to “F”, the initial volume level when the power is turned on, etc. The volume (for example, the initial volume) may be set according to the first volume level, not based on the second volume level only when the initial light intensity is set.

  The “initial display of the stage display when displaying the stage display” may be, for example, a stage display that is displayed first after the first volume stage is set by the first setting unit. In addition, the display may be a step display that is displayed first after the data display device 4 is turned on, or may be a step display that is displayed first in one period in which the second operation can be performed. May be.

  The initial display when the stage display is displayed for the first time by performing the second operation may indicate the second volume stage before being changed by the second operation. That is, the initial display may indicate a volume level corresponding to the first volume level after the first operation and before the second operation, and is not actually displayed. May be.

  For example, the stage display may be a display that can specify the second volume stage (the second volume stage that is currently set or the second volume stage that is set in the future), and the number of squares corresponding to the second volume stage. The second volume level may be displayed as a bar. In this case, if a volume adjustment button is provided and a volume change operation is performed, the bar is displayed as an initial display first, and the number of squares is increased or decreased according to the subsequent volume adjustment button operation. Display control may be performed. Thus, a dedicated operation unit for changing the volume may be provided, and the volume may be adjusted when an operation is performed on the operation unit. As will be described later, the second volume level to be set is the second volume level when the second volume level is set with the enter button or the like after the volume level being displayed (for example, the highlighted volume level) is changed. It is a stage. The stage display may represent, for example, a second volume level (a second volume level currently set or a second volume level set in the future) by a number.

  For example, in the stage display, the second volume level is displayed as a bar with the number of squares corresponding to the second volume level, and when the volume adjustment button is first operated, the number of squares is increased or decreased according to the operation of the volume adjustment button. You may make it display the made bar first. In this case, a virtual bar before the increase / decrease may be set as the initial display. As described above, the initial display may indicate a volume level corresponding to the first volume level after the first operation and before the second operation, and is not actually displayed. It may be.

  Further, “differs depending on the first volume level set by the first setting means” means that the second volume level changes in response to at least a part of changes that can be taken by the first volume level. It is an expression that includes the stage to do. For example, the second volume level may be changed by one level every time the first volume level changes by one level, or may change by one level when the first volume level changes by a plurality of levels. That is, the first volume level and the second volume level do not have to change one to one. For example, the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 may correspond to the initial display and the actual volume range on a one-to-one basis, or one initial display and volume may be assigned to a plurality of channels. Further, the actual volume range may be shifted for each of a plurality of channels. The plurality of channels and the first volume level correspond one-to-one in the present embodiment and the like, but may not be one-to-one if there is a certain correspondence. For example, one first volume level may be assigned to a plurality of channels.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first display control unit 411 increases the second volume level indicated by the initial display as the first volume level set by the volume etc. setting unit 416 is higher. Yes. According to such a configuration, the relationship between the first volume level and the second volume level can be easily grasped, so that the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  Note that the second volume level of the initial display may be decreased as the first volume level is increased. For example, when the actual volume range is higher as the first volume level is higher, the volume level is suddenly reduced by lowering the second volume level of the initial display as the first volume level is higher. Can be prevented from becoming large.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the confirmation sound output control unit 415 outputs a confirmation sound indicating that the second sound level is newly set when the second sound volume level is newly set by the sound volume setting unit 416. When the first volume level is newly set by the volume setting unit 416, the sound output unit 450 does not output a confirmation sound indicating that the first volume level is newly set. According to such a configuration, since the setting can be confirmed even with sound in the second volume stage, the volume can be adjusted suitably.

  The confirmation sound may always be a fixed volume regardless of the change in the volume set above. Similarly, for example, a predetermined notification sound such as a warning sound when an abnormality occurs in the data display device 4 may be fixed. This can prevent the notification sound from being lowered by the player.

  The plurality of stages that can be taken by the first volume stage set by the volume etc. setting unit 416 is a restriction stage (channels “A” to “F”) that restricts the volume etc. setting unit 416 from setting the second volume stage. And the processing unit 410 performs setting restriction that restricts the volume setting unit 416 from setting the second volume level when the volume setting unit 416 sets the restriction level as the first volume level. . With such a configuration, it is possible to limit the volume setting by the customer, and to prevent sound output at a volume that is not intended by the game store.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the setting restriction by the player or the like is not performed, a corresponding image corresponding to the fact that the second permission condition is satisfied is displayed, and when the setting restriction is performed, the corresponding image is displayed. Not to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify a player or the like that the setting of the second volume level is restricted.

  In addition, the data display device 4 includes a first display unit 430 capable of displaying an image, and a third communication unit 485 that receives a possessed ball count signal from the inter-counter counting unit 5 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2. Prepare. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 executes a display control process for displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 when the number of possessed balls specified based on the possessed ball number signal reaches the first display threshold. Even when the number of possessed balls falls below the first display threshold when the first predetermined image is displayed on the first display unit 430, the first non-display threshold that is smaller by the predetermined number than the first display threshold may be reached. For example, a non-display control process is executed to hide the first predetermined image when the first predetermined image is not hidden and falls below the first non-display threshold.

  According to this, by displaying the first predetermined image on the first display unit 430 based on the number of balls possessed by the player, the game state of the player can be given to the player playing the game machine and the surrounding players. It is possible to notify (the number of game media possessions) in an easily understandable form. Further, the first non-display threshold value for hiding the predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold value for displaying the predetermined image. By providing this predetermined number of threshold differences, it is possible to prevent frequent switching between display / non-display of a predetermined image due to increase / decrease in the number of possessed balls just before the threshold.

[1-10. Modified example]
[1-10-1. Volume setting process]
The sound volume setting process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is not limited to the process described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, a modification of the volume setting process will be described.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a second volume setting process executed by the processing unit 410 instead of the volume setting process of FIG. Note that the same steps as those in the sound volume setting process in FIG. 29 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

  If the change screen display operation for the volume etc. is detected in M9 (M9; Yes), the volume etc. setting section 416 determines whether or not the sound output from the sound output section 450 is under sound output control (P10). For example, it is determined that the sound output control of a specific sound is being performed when the above-described simultaneous production (display of a big hit running production or a special video) is being displayed on the first display unit 430.

  When this condition is satisfied (P10; Yes), the sound volume setting unit 416 performs a sound volume change restriction notification process (P12). Specifically, in order to notify the player that the change in volume / light quantity is restricted (restricted), for example, a display message indicating that is displayed on the first display unit 430. In addition to displaying the display message on the first display unit 430 as a volume change change notification, the sound output unit 450 sends a voice message for notifying the player that the volume / light quantity change is limited. Sound may be output, or the light emitting unit 455 may be lit / flashed with a predetermined light emission color (for example, red).

  After P12, the volume etc. setting unit 416 moves the process to M25. On the other hand, when it is determined that the condition is not satisfied in P10 (P10; No), the volume etc. setting unit 416 moves the process to M11.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 in this case.
FIG. 39A is a diagram illustrating an example of a big hit running effect screen.
On the big hit running effect screen, a big hit running effect image congratulating the big hit is displayed in the frame at the center of the screen. In this jackpot running effect image, music and a voice message congratulating the jackpot are output from the sound output unit 450 according to the image.

  In this state, when the volume / light quantity change icon displayed at the bottom of the screen is tapped by the player, for example, a volume / light quantity change restriction display shown in FIG. 39 (2) is displayed. Specifically, in the center of the jackpot running presentation screen, a pop-up display of a volume restriction change notification screen for a balloon with the message “Volume / light quantity cannot be changed because the jackpot running presentation is in progress” is displayed. ing. The player can know that the change of the volume / light quantity is currently restricted on the volume etc. change restriction notification screen.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing another example of the volume / light quantity change restriction display.
FIG. 40 (1) is an example of a big hit running effect screen, and a call icon, a service icon, and a menu icon are displayed at the bottom.

  In this state, when the player taps the menu icon displayed at the bottom of the screen, for example, a menu screen shown in FIG. 40 (2) is displayed. Specifically, a display screen selection icon and a display customization icon are displayed. Here, since the change of the volume / light quantity is limited during the big hit running effect, the volume / light quantity change icon is not displayed on the menu screen.

[1-10-2. Volume change processing]
The volume changing process that can be executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is not limited to the volume changing process described with reference to FIG. 30, and various volume changing processes can be executed. Hereinafter, a modified example of the volume changing process will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a second volume changing process executed by the processing unit 410 instead of the volume changing process of FIG. Note that the same steps as those in the volume changing process are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in N3 that the operation is a change operation outside the range on the maximum volume side (N3; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 outputs the confirmation sound output of the currently set volume to the sound output unit 450. Control to start (Q5). If it is determined in N7 that the operation is a change operation outside the range on the minimum volume side (N7; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 outputs the confirmation sound of the currently set volume to the sound output unit. It is controlled to start at 450 (Q9).

  In the second volume changing process, when the volume changing operation is an operation for changing the volume to a volume outside the predetermined range, the confirmation sound corresponding to the limit volume of the predetermined range (volume changeable range) is not output. The feature is that the sound output unit 450 outputs a confirmation sound of the currently set volume. Even when such processing is performed, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed, a confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the current volume is output. You can recognize that you are going to change.

  When the volume change operation is an operation for changing the volume to a volume outside the predetermined range, a confirmation sound for the volume within the predetermined range is output as in the first volume change process, or as in the second volume change process. In addition to outputting the confirmation sound of the currently set volume, for example, the confirmation sound of the volume located at the center of the predetermined range, or the confirmation sound of the volume that is smaller / larger by one than the limit of the predetermined range is output. Etc.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a third volume changing process executed by the processing unit 410 instead of the volume changing process of FIG. Note that the same steps as those in the volume changing process are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the confirmation sound output control unit 415 determines that the operation is a change operation outside the range on the maximum volume side (R1; Yes), or when it is determined that the operation is a change operation outside the range on the minimum volume side (R3) ; Yes), the process proceeds to R21 without outputting the confirmation sound.

  After the volume setting unit 416 sets the volume corresponding to the channel and the highlighted volume in N13, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the next output confirmation sound is set (R15). Here, the set of confirmation sound for next output is to temporarily store the volume of the confirmation sound to be output in a predetermined area of the storage unit 490 before the output of the confirmation sound. Is output, that is, when there is a confirmation sound for output at present, the volume of the confirmation sound for next output is stored in a region different from the storage region of the volume of the confirmation sound being output.

  When the next output confirmation sound is set (R15; Yes), the volume setting unit 416 performs an update process for updating the next output confirmation sound (R17). Specifically, the volume etc. setting unit 416 sets the confirmation sound for the next output corresponding to the currently set first volume level and the newly set second volume level, that is, setting switching. The volume of the confirmation sound corresponding to the state of the switch 460 and the highlighted volume is updated (R17). That is, the volume of the confirmation sound for next output is a volume based on the latest volume change operation by the customer.

  If it is determined that the next output confirmation sound is not set (R15; No), the volume setting unit 416 performs a setting process for setting the next output confirmation sound (R19). Specifically, the volume setting unit 416 sets the volume corresponding to the currently set first volume level and the newly set second volume level, that is, the state of the setting changeover switch 460 and the highlighted volume. Set the confirmation sound for next output with the corresponding volume.

  After R17 or R19, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the confirmation sound output timer is counting (R21). If it is determined that the confirmation sound is being counted (R21; Yes), the confirmation sound is being output. The timer is updated by subtracting “1” (R23).

  Next, the processing unit 410 determines whether or not the confirmation sound outputting timer has expired (R25). If it is determined that the time is up (R25; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 controls to end the output of the confirmation sound for current output of the sound output unit 450 (R27). If it is determined that the time is not up (R25; No), the processing unit 410 ends the third volume changing process.

  When it is determined in R21 that the confirmation sound output timer is not counting (R21; No), or after R27, the volume setting unit 416 determines whether or not the next output confirmation sound is set. (R29). If it determines with it not having been set (R29; No), the process part 410 will complete | finish a 3rd volume change process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set (R29; Yes), the volume setting unit 416 changes the next output confirmation sound to the current output confirmation sound (R31). Then, the confirmation sound output control unit 415 controls the sound output unit 450 to start outputting the confirmation sound for current output (R33). And the process part 410 complete | finishes a 3rd volume change process, after starting the count of the confirmation sound output timer (R35).

  In the third volume changing process, the volume changing operation performed while the confirmation sound is being output is enabled. However, when a new volume is set, the confirmation sound is output by the previous confirmation sound. It is output after it is finished. For this reason, when a visitor performs operations for a short period of time, the confirmation sound is output continuously, and there is no possibility that the visitor will misidentify the confirmation sound. It is easy to grasp which volume is.

  In the third volume changing process, when a new volume is set, the confirmation sound is output after the previous confirmation sound ends. When a new volume change operation is performed during output and the volume is newly set, the confirmation sound based on this new setting may not be output.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of a fourth volume changing process executed by the processing unit 410 instead of the volume changing process of FIG. Note that the same steps as those in the volume changing process are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fourth volume change process, when it is determined that the operation is a change operation outside the range on the maximum volume side in N3 (N3; Yes), or it is determined that the operation is a change operation outside the range on the minimum volume side in N5 In the case (N7; Yes), the confirmation sound output control unit 415 ends the fourth sound volume changing process without outputting the confirmation sound from the sound output unit 450.

  If it is determined in N7 that the operation is not a change operation outside the range of the minimum volume side (N7; No), the volume change unit 417 displays the highlighted volume (second volume level) according to the operation content. Is changed (N11). Then, the volume setting unit 416 sets the volume according to the channel of the setting changeover switch 460 and the highlighted volume (N13). By performing this setting, the specific sound is output from the sound output unit 450 at the set volume thereafter.

  Next, the confirmation sound output control unit 415 performs control to start outputting the confirmation sound having the volume set in N13 (N15). And the process part 410 complete | finishes a 4th volume change process, after starting the timer count of the confirmation sound output timer (N17).

  In the fourth volume changing process, the confirmation sound is not output when it is attempted to further lower the volume at the current lowest level or further increase the volume at the current highest level. Also by doing in this way, as in the first to third volume changing processes, the store visitor including the player is performing a volume changing operation beyond the range in which the volume can be set. Can be grasped.

  In the fourth volume change process described above, the confirmation sound is not output when attempting to further lower the volume that is currently at the lowest level or further increase the volume that is currently at the highest level. However, in the fourth volume changing process, the operation interval (operation time interval) from when one operation is performed to when another operation is performed is greater than the time for outputting the confirmation sound corresponding to the one operation. However, it is possible to apply a process in which a confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the volume set by the other operation is not output. Specifically, the steps R21 to R35 in the third volume changing process of FIG. 42 may be similarly applied to the fourth volume changing process.

  Furthermore, when the confirmation sound is not output multiple times, the confirmation sound corresponding to one operation is output and then the confirmation sound of the volume corresponding to the volume set by the other latest operation is output. You may apply. Specifically, the steps R15 to R35 in the third volume changing process of FIG. 42 may be similarly applied to the fourth volume changing process.

[1-10-3. Channel settings]
In the above embodiment, the hall computer 6 selects the setting data relating to the volume from the settings of the plurality of setting Nos based on the volume setting table 684, and includes this in the volume setting data 693 to display the data display device. 4 is described as being transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and the channel setting may be transmitted from the hall computer 6 to the data display device 4.

  Specifically, channel settings may be transmitted to the data display device 4 in individual units or group units. The group unit can be, for example, a type unit of the pachinko machine 2 or a game island unit in which the pachinko machine 2 is installed, and the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 in these group units. The channel setting may be transmitted.

  For example, when the type unit of the pachinko machine 2 is used, the setting of the channel “A” is transmitted to the data display device 4 provided corresponding to “Pachinko XXX”, and “Pachinko YYY” is supported. The setting of the channel “B” may be transmitted to the data display device 4 provided. In addition, when the game island unit is used, even if pachinko machines 2 of different types are installed together on the game island, the data provided corresponding to the first to tenth pachinko machines 2 is provided. The setting of the channel “A” is transmitted to the display device 4, and the setting of the channel “B” is transmitted to the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the 11th to 20th pachinko machines 2. Etc.

  In the above case, the channel setting transmitted from the hall computer 6 to the data display device 4 is given priority in principle. However, the manager of the store uses the setting changeover switch 460 provided in the data display device 4. The channel may be changed by performing an operation.

  Further, it may be possible to set on the store side which of the channel setting transmitted from the hall computer 6 and the channel setting by the setting changeover switch 460 is prioritized. When priority is given to the channel setting transmitted from the hall computer 6, the channel setting by the setting changeover switch 460 may be disabled. In this case, the setting by the hall computer 6 is replaced with the first setting. On the other hand, when priority is given to the channel setting by the setting changeover switch 460, the channel setting may not be transmitted from the hall computer 6 to the data display device 4. In this case, the setting by the setting changeover switch 460 is the first setting.

  In addition, said structure is good also as applying to both a volume and a light quantity, and good also as applying only about either one of a volume and a light quantity.

[1-10-4. Display screen]
FIG. 44 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the display screen displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4.

  In the menu screen of FIG. 44 (1), a display screen selection icon, a display customization icon, and a volume / light quantity change icon are displayed. When the volume / light quantity change icon is tapped on this menu screen, a bar composed of a plurality of rectangles indicating the second volume level is displayed on the right side of the screen as shown in FIG. At this time, the volume / light quantity change icon is not displayed. A customer including a player can change the volume by tapping a rectangle that forms a bar displayed on the right side of the screen.

  Specifically, display control is performed so that the number of rectangles is increased or decreased by a tap operation on the rectangles forming the bar, and the volume is changed. For example, in the menu screen of FIG. 44 (2), the second volume level at the top is changed as shown in FIG. 44 (3) by tapping the second rectangle from the top among the rectangles constituting the bar. The indicated rectangle is not displayed, and the volume is changed one step lower.

[1-10-5. Special possession ball display processing]
The possessed ball special display process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is not limited to the process described with reference to FIG. Hereinafter, a modified example of the possessed ball special display process will be described.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the second possessed ball special display process executed by the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 in place of the possessed ball special display process of FIG.

  The possessed sphere special display processing unit 413 calculates first unit sphere number = number of possessed spheres− (first display counter value × first display threshold value) (F1). Also, the possessed sphere special display processing unit 413 calculates the second unit sphere number = the possessed sphere number− (second display counter value × second unit sphere number) (F3). Here, the first unit ball number is a possessed ball number normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 1000 shots in order to enable threshold determination using the first display threshold value and the first non-display threshold value. The second unit ball count is a possessed ball count normalized to a numerical range of 0 to 5000 shots in order to enable threshold determination using the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value.

  Next, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the first unit ball number has reached the first display threshold value (F5), and if it is determined that it has reached (F5; Yes), the first display 1 is added to the counter value (F7). Then, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the second unit ball number has reached the second display threshold (F9). If it is determined that it has reached (F9; Yes), the second display Control is performed so that the number of second predetermined images corresponding to the counter value is displayed on the first display unit 430 (F11).

  Next, the possessed sphere special display processing unit 413 performs control to delete all the first predetermined images from the first display unit 430 (F13). Then, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 adds 1 to the second display counter value (F15), resets the first display counter value (F17), and ends the second possessed ball special display process.

  If it is determined in F9 that the second unit ball count has not reached the second display threshold value (F9; No), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 has a number of first predetermined images corresponding to the first display counter value. Is displayed on the first display unit 430 (F19). Then, the second possessed ball special display process ends.

  If it is determined in F5 that the first unit ball count has not reached the first display threshold value (F5; No), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether the first unit ball count has fallen below the first non-display threshold value. It is determined whether or not (F21).

  If it is determined that the first number of unit balls has fallen below the first non-display threshold (F21; Yes), the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the first display counter value is 0 (F23). If it is determined that it is not 0 (F23; No), 1 is subtracted from the first display counter value (F25). Then, control is performed to display the number of first predetermined images corresponding to the first display counter value on the first display unit 430 (F27).

  Thereafter, the possessed ball special display processing unit 413 determines whether or not the second unit ball number has fallen below the second non-display threshold (F29). If it is determined that the value is lower (F29; Yes), it is determined whether the second display counter value is 0 (F31). If it is determined that the value is not 0 (F31; No), the second display is performed. 1 is subtracted from the counter value (F33). And after performing control which displays the 2nd predetermined image of the number according to a 2nd display counter value on the 1st display part 430 (F35), a 2nd possessed ball special display process is complete | finished.

  By performing such second possessed ball special display processing, a game in which the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are appropriately displayed / hidden according to the number of possessed balls of the player and a game is played on the gaming machine. It is possible to inform the player and surrounding players of the game state (the number of game media possessed) of the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

[2. Second Embodiment]
[2-1. Game system configuration]
FIG. 46 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a second gaming system 1B in the second embodiment. The second gaming system 1B includes a plurality of pachinko machines 2 that are a kind of gaming machines installed on a game island (not shown), a gaming device provided corresponding to each pachinko machine 2, a recording medium processing device, and a counting device. A card unit 3 that is a kind of device, a hall computer 6 that is a kind of management device and control device, a coin management computer 8 that is a kind of management device and control device, and a pachinko machine 2 are provided. It comprises a call lamp device 9 which is a kind of game device and information display device.

  The card unit 3 is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the pachinko machine 2 at a side position on a predetermined side of the pachinko machine 2, and is issued to a visitor player who is not registered as a member in the game hall. A visitor card, which is a recording medium for use, or a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall, is accepted, and the visitor card or membership card (hereinafter, “ A game medium used for a game in the pachinko machine 2 based on the value of the valuable value (prepaid balance) specified from the game value identification information (prepaid balance data) recorded in the card). A game for performing a process for lending a game ball or a process for counting a game ball acquired in a game in the pachinko machine 2 and paying out a game ball within the range of the counted game balls. A use device and a recording medium processing apparatus.

  The card unit 3 includes a sound output unit 350 having a speaker, and is configured to be able to output a specific sound and a confirmation sound from the sound output unit 350. The card unit 3 can set the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit 350 in accordance with the operation of the customer including the player who plays with the pachinko machine 2, and the set volume can be set to the volume of the customer. It can be changed according to the change operation.

  Further, the card unit 3 is configured to be able to output a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set after the operation from the sound output unit 350 when the volume change operation is performed by the customer. The card unit 3 can set the volume within a predetermined range (volume changeable range), and when the set volume is at the limit of the predetermined range, the card unit 3 changes the volume outside the limit of the predetermined range. When the volume change operation is performed as described above, a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume limit within a predetermined range is output from the sound output unit 350.

  In the present embodiment, the specific sound that can be output from the sound output unit 350 by the card unit 3 is, for example, a player who forgets to remove a game card (member card or visitor card) used for a game on the pachinko machine 2. Includes the voice of forgetting to remove the card.

  The confirmation sound is a sound for notifying the customer that the volume has been changed at the volume set after the operation when the customer including the player has changed the volume on the card unit 3. is there. In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, sound such as sound effects and voice voices are output as confirmation sounds for a short time (for example, 1 second to 3 seconds) that allows the customer to confirm the volume after the change. It will be described as to do. Further, in the present embodiment, when the volume set in the card unit 3 is at the limit of the predetermined range, when the volume change operation is performed by the customer to change the volume outside the limit of the predetermined range. The sound output unit 350 outputs a confirmation sound corresponding to a volume limit within a predetermined range. Details will be described later.

  The calling lamp device 9 is a kind of information display device that has a horizontally long box shape when viewed from the front. The calling lamp device 9 is used by a player playing a game on the pachinko machine 2 to call a store clerk. The game information related to the pachinko machine 2 is displayed on a display unit (display) 930 provided on the front surface. Further, the calling lamp device 9 is configured to be able to output sound from a sound output unit (speaker) 950 provided on the front surface.

  Each pachinko machine 2 is configured to be individually identifiable by a machine number, and the pachinko machine 2, the card unit 3, and the calling lamp device 9 are connected to the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8 via the machine terminal 10. Has been. In FIG. 1, for the sake of simplicity, four pachinko machines 2 installed on the amusement island are illustrated.

[2-2. Information and signal flow]
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the flow of information and signals between the devices of the second gaming system 1B. In FIG. 47, illustration of the base terminal 10 is omitted for simplicity of explanation.

  From the pachinko machine 2, signals relating to the game such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a short time signal, a driving signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal are output to the calling lamp device 9 and the hall computer 6.

  From the card unit 3, the possessed ball number signal indicating the number of possessed balls counted by the counting payout unit 380, the card insertion signal indicating that the possession card has been inserted, and the possession card have been discharged. Is output to the calling lamp device 9. Further, the card unit 3 outputs card information recorded on the accepted membership card or visitor card to the possession management computer 8.

  Further, the hall computer 6 outputs a display management signal for performing an instruction and control for causing the display unit of the calling lamp device 9 to perform a predetermined display. The calling lamp device 9 displays game data and the like of the pachinko machine 2 on the display unit 930 based on the display management signal received from the hall computer 6.

  The hall computer 6 transmits volume setting data 693 and light amount setting data 695 to the card unit 3. Then, the card unit 3 sets or changes the volume / light quantity based on the volume setting data 693 and the light quantity setting data 695 received from the hall computer 6.

[2-3. Configuration of pachinko machine and card unit]
FIG. 48 is a front view showing an external configuration of the pachinko machine 2 and the card unit 3 in the second embodiment. In addition, since the structure of the pachinko machine 2 is the same as 1st Embodiment, description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

  On the front surface of the card unit 3, a multi-function lamp 301 that is configured by a full color LED and is lit in a plurality of colors so that the state of the card unit 3 can be notified, and a bill insertion slot 302 for inserting a bill. A display unit 355 protruding from the front side of the apparatus to the front side of the apparatus, a payout button 311 for receiving a counting payout operation for paying out the counted number of balls, and a card for inserting a membership card or a visitor card An insertion port 309 is provided.

  A card insertion slot 309 provided on the front surface of the card unit 3 is connected to a card slot 392 of a card reader / writer 327 built in a position corresponding to the card insertion slot 309, and the card insertion slot 309 is connected via the card insertion slot 309. The visitor card and the membership card can be inserted into the card slot 392.

  Here, in the visitor card and the membership card, a non-volatile memory for storing various data and control for rewriting and reading out the recorded information and non-contact communication with an external reader / writer device. An IC card on which an IC chip having a card portion is mounted is used, and in these visitor cards and member cards, card IDs that can identify individual cards are stored in advance so as not to be rewritten. The type can be identified from the card ID, and various data such as prepaid balance data that can specify the prepaid balance and a distribution flag that can specify the presence or absence of distribution are stored.

  The member card is issued to a member player who has registered as a member in the game hall, and a member ID assigned to the member is stored in a non-rewritable manner. In addition, as will be described later, the member player using the membership card can use the game balls once acquired and counted for the game after the next day, or to store the balls that can be used for prize exchange. However, the member card does not directly record the number of stored balls, which is the number of game balls in which the stored balls have been stored, and the number of stored balls, as will be described later, In FIG. 8, the member card ID and the member ID are stored in association with each other, so that the member card ID and the member ID are specified.

  Also, the membership card does not directly record the number of balls based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the membership card. By being stored in association with the member ID, it is specified from the member card ID or the member ID, and the number of possessed balls can be used in the game at each card unit 3 in the game hall only on that day. It can be used, and can be used for prize exchange at a prize exchange POS terminal (not shown).

  The visitor card is purchased and issued by a card issuing / payment machine (not shown) installed in the amusement hall, and is also issued by the card unit 3. The visitor card stores the number of balls and date based on the counted number of balls counted by the player who owns the visitor card, and the number of balls is stored only on the day of the game. The card unit 3 can be used for games and can be used for prize exchange at the prize exchange POS terminal.

  The display unit 355 includes a menu button 316a for selecting a menu, a table data button 316b for displaying table data, and a membership card ID and a membership ID recorded on the membership card when a membership card is received. A replay button 316c for executing a replay game using a specified number of stored balls, a volume / light quantity change button 316d for changing the volume / light quantity, a cross button 316e composed of left / right up / down keys and an enter key An operation button 316 is provided.

  In addition, the display unit 355 receives an infrared signal from the replay display unit 317 for notifying that the operation of the replay button 316c is effective and the remote controller for setting owned by the attendant of the game hall, and An IR light receiving unit 315 that converts the signal into a signal and outputs the signal is provided, and a touch panel 314 is provided on the surface of the display unit 355 so that each display item displayed on the display unit 355 can be input with a finger. It has been.

  In addition, inside the display unit 355, switches corresponding to a liquid crystal display 313 and operation buttons 316 described later are provided, and these are display control boards 329 provided at positions in the apparatus corresponding to the display unit 355. The display control board 329 performs display control of the liquid crystal display 313, input position detection using the touch panel 314, and the like.

  At the upper position in the card unit 3, a banknote inserted in the banknote insertion slot 302 is connected, and a bill inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302 is taken to identify its authenticity and banknote type. A banknote identification unit 302a that is output to a control unit 300, which will be described later, is provided in the section. In the banknote identification unit 302a, various banknotes (10,000 yen, 5,000 yen, 2,000 yen, and 1,000 yen banknotes) are provided. ) Can be accepted.

  A control unit 300 for controlling the operation of the card unit 3 is provided at a substantially central position of the card unit 3 so as to be easily connected to each part constituting the card unit 3. As will be described later, Various operations of the card unit 3 are controlled by the control unit 300.

  Also, at the lowermost position of the card unit 3, a game ball is counted and taken in, and the counted game ball is a maximum fraction, that is, a fraction less than 125 units which is a payout unit in the corresponding pachinko machine 2. A counting payout unit 380 is provided that stores only the maximum value of 24, and counts and pays out game balls having a fractional part.

[2-4. Functional configuration of card unit]
FIG. 49 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the card unit 3.
The card unit 3 is a control unit that provides various functions of the card unit 3 by controlling each part of the bill recognition unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, the display control board 329, and the card unit 3 with a control program. 300, the bill recognition unit 302a, the card reader / writer 327, and the display control board 329 are connected to the control unit 300 and can transmit and receive various data.

  The card reader / writer 327 reads and writes recorded information such as (member) card ID, member ID (member card only), prepaid balance data, and the like recorded in the member card and visitor card inserted from the card insertion slot 309. I do.

  The control unit 300 includes a processing unit 310, a ROM 320, a RAM 330, and a clock unit 335.

  The processing unit 310 is a control device and an arithmetic device configured to include a processor such as a CPU and a DSP that collectively control the card unit 3 and an integrated circuit such as an ASIC. In the present embodiment, the processing unit 310 includes, as main functional units, a possessed ball special display processing unit 310a, a volume setting unit 310b, a volume change unit 310c, a light amount change unit 310d, and a specific sound output control unit 310e. And a confirmation sound output control unit 310f.

  The ROM 320 is a nonvolatile read-only storage device, and stores a main program 321 that is read by the processing unit 310 and executed as a main process, and a possessed ball special display threshold table 322.

  The main program 321 includes a card unit processing program 321a executed as card unit processing, a possessed ball special display processing program 321b executed as possessed ball special display processing, and a volume change processing program 321c executed as volume change processing. And a light quantity change processing program 321d executed as the light quantity change process as a subroutine. These processes will be described later in detail using a flowchart.

  In addition, about the possessed ball special display process, since the process similar to the possessed ball special display process and 2nd possessed ball special display process which were demonstrated in 1st Embodiment is applicable, description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the possessed sphere special display threshold value table 322 can be similarly applied to the possessed sphere special display threshold value table 494 described in the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  As for the volume change process, the volume change process (see FIG. 30), the second volume change process (see FIG. 41), the third volume change process (see FIG. 42), and the fourth volume change described in the first embodiment. Since a process similar to the process (see FIG. 43) can be applied, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The RAM 330 is a volatile readable / writable storage device. The card ID of the visitor card or membership card being received by the card reader / writer 327 and the remaining prepaid amount, the number of possessions, the number of savings, the number of points visited, etc. Various data such as base data of the pachinko machine 2 to be played and game information of members playing the game are stored. The RAM 330 is backed up by a battery (not shown) and retains data stored for a predetermined period even when the power is shut off.

  The RAM 330 stores possessed ball number data 331, card information 332, processing data 333, volume setting data 693, and light amount setting data 695.

  The possessed ball number data 331 is data on the number of possessed balls possessed by the player, and is updated based on the count result of the count payout unit 380.

  The card information 332 is information on a gaming card in which an ID (member ID or the like) for identifying a player, the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls, etc. is recorded.

  The processing data 333 is processing data for the processing unit 310 to perform the possessed sphere special display in the possessed sphere special display process. The first display counter value, the second display counter value, the first integer n, the first Data for processing such as 2 integer m is temporarily stored.

  The volume setting data 693 is volume setting data generated and transmitted by the hall computer 6, and the data structure is the same as the volume setting data 693 described in the first embodiment.

  The light amount setting data 695 is light amount setting data generated and transmitted by the hall computer 6, and the data configuration is the same as the light amount setting data 695 described in the first embodiment.

  As described above, the control unit 300 is operatively connected to a prize ball control board (not shown) provided in the pachinko machine 2 to exchange various signals associated with the rental of game balls. As described above, by connecting to the information output board of the pachinko machine 2 via the signal cable, various external output signals such as a big hit signal can be input.

  The control unit 300 is connected to an out ball counter 16 provided at a lower position of the corresponding pachinko machine 2 so that a driving signal from the out ball counter 16 can be input. In response to the input of the driving signal from the counter 16, a predetermined number corresponding to the driving signal is added to the value of the total driving ball number in the game information table described later and updated.

  The control unit 300 is connected to the count payout unit 380. The control unit 300 inputs a count sensor signal output when the game balls are counted in the count payout unit 380, and based on the count sensor signal. Update the number of possessed balls. For example, as described above, a game ball that has flowed into the count payout unit 380 is detected by a count sensor, and a detection signal of a predetermined pulse is sent from the count payout unit 380 to the control unit 300 in response to detection of one game ball. The number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) output and stored in the control unit 300 increases by one. The configuration of the counting / dispensing unit 380 is the same as that of the counting / dispensing unit 380 provided in the inter-counter counting unit 5 of the first embodiment, and a repetitive description thereof will be omitted.

  The control unit 300 is connected to a payout button switch 311 ′ corresponding to a payout button 311 provided at a position below the display unit 355 on the front surface of the apparatus, and a signal corresponding to the operation of the payout button 311 is sent to the control unit 300. By inputting from the button switch 311 ′, it is possible to grasp whether or not the payout button 311 is operated. When it is detected that the payout button 311 has been pressed, the control unit 300 pays back a predetermined number of unit balls among the number of possessed balls to the player. As in the first embodiment, the description will be made assuming that the number of unit balls repaid to the player by one rebate operation is 125.

  The control unit 300 updates the possessed ball count data 331 by subtracting 125 from the stored possessed ball count every time a refund operation is performed. However, if the refund operation is performed when the number of possessed balls is less than 125, the number of possessed balls is set to zero. That is, the number of balls corresponding to the stored number of possessed balls is subtracted.

  As in the first embodiment, when the number of balls possessed by the player increases, the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 are counted from the lower plate 24 by keeping the counting lever 341 pulled by the player. When the player flows into the passage 343 at any time and increases at any time by being counted by the counting payout unit 380, the player has accumulated the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 2 without pulling the counting lever 341 in the lower plate. When the game ball is accumulated to some extent, the count lever 341 is pulled, and the accumulated game ball flows into the counting passage 343 at once, and is counted by the counting payout unit 380 to increase at once. There are two cases. Further, when the number of balls possessed by the player decreases, the game ball is paid back to the player by the player's refund operation, and as described above, the number of refunds by one refund operation is 125. The number of possessed balls decreases by 125 by one refund operation.

  In addition, as described above, the control unit 300 includes a remaining amount indicator provided in the operation unit of the corresponding pachinko machine 2, a lending button switch for detecting the operation of the lending button, a member card or a visitor card being received. A return button switch that detects the operation of the return button that is operated when returning the item is connected, and the operation of the lending button and the operation of the return button can be detected, and the display control of these remaining amount indicators is performed.

  The control unit 300 outputs various information input from the display control board 329 according to the output from the IR light receiving unit 315 according to transmission from the remote controller, the operation of various buttons provided on the display unit 355, or the operation of the touch panel. The full color provided in the multifunction lamp connected to the control unit 300 in response to the currency identification information by the banknote identification unit 302a, the card insertion information from the card reader / writer 327, the visitor card storage state information, etc. Overall operation control is performed such as lighting control of each LED such as the LED 301a, control of the card reader / writer 327 and the display control board 329, display control of the balance indicator, and the like.

  Further, the control unit 300 is based on a card acceptance process for determining whether or not a member card or a visitor card inserted into the card insertion slot 309 can be used, or based on the prepaid balance data read from the member card or visitor card being accepted. Depending on the lending process that uses the prepaid balance and the receipt of money, the prepaid balance remaining on the member card or visitor card that is being accepted is deposited, or the prepaid balance is written to a new visitor card and issued Issuance / payment processing, return processing for returning member cards and visitor cards being accepted by return operation using the return button, replay processing using the number of stored balls, and counting the number of balls counted by accepting the operation of the payout button 311 (insertion) (Including the number of balls specified by the visitor card and membership card) To perform the processing of the payout processing for subtraction update the number of balls that issued 該払 go have out the (return) from the counting already Ball number.

  The control unit 300 is connected to an external device such as a hall computer 6 and a ball management computer 8 connected to a local area network (LAN) via a HUB so as to be able to perform data communication. Various data can be sent and received.

  The display control board 329 connected to the control unit 300 includes a liquid crystal display 313 and a touch panel 314 that constitute the display unit 355, switches corresponding to various operation buttons 316, an IR light receiving unit 315, and the replay display unit described above. An electronic component such as an LED 320a provided on the touch panel 314 is connected to the display control board 329. Information on the operation information of the touch panel 314, operation information of various switches, and information based on an output signal output from the IR light receiving unit 315 is displayed on the display control board 329. To the control unit 300.

  In the display control board 329 of the present embodiment, a display driving circuit (not shown) that performs display driving of the liquid crystal display 313 and a position that is pressed based on an output signal from the touch panel 314 are specified and specified. An input position detection circuit (not shown) that outputs input position information, a VDP (not shown) that performs processing related to a display image displayed on the display unit 355, and a VROM (not shown) that stores image data used for menu display and the like. (Not shown), VRAM (not shown) for temporarily storing display data to be displayed on the display unit 355, and independent of the control unit 300, judgments and processes associated with inputs of various switches and touch panels are based on the processing program. A display control microcomputer to be implemented is mounted, and various displays are performed based on display data (page data) output from the control unit 300. Surfaces, and it is capable of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 313 constituting the display unit 355.

  The card unit 3 is a visitor card (also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, or a member game registered as a member in the game hall. A membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a person, is accepted. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The card unit 3 that has received these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the remaining card amount, the number of possessed balls, or the number of stored balls) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into a game ball.

  On the front face of the card unit 3, a bill insertion slot for inserting bills and a card insertion / discharge port for inserting a membership card and a visitor card are provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port is received by the card reader / writer, and the information recorded on the card is read. The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  When the card unit 3 accepts a membership card, a replay game using the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (hereinafter simply referred to as “card ID”) and the number of balls specified by the card ID. Is provided with a replay button 316c.

  When the replay button 316c is operated, if the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball. Based on this, it is possible to play a game with the pachinko machine 2. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possessed balls is not recorded, and the stored ball is recorded in the managed ball management computer 8, a part of the stored ball is withdrawn and the game It is converted into a ball and a game with the pachinko machine 2 becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding ball are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. Separately from the replay button 316c, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the possessed ball may be provided, and the replay button may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a ball deposited in the hall with a ball acquired before the previous day, and becomes a game ball by paying out the saving ball. The stored ball is a game medium deposited in the game hall and is managed by the possession ball management computer 8.

  As described above, the number of possessed balls is the number of game balls owned by the player as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine, and has not yet been deposited in the game hall. It is the number of balls. As mentioned above, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of play at the amusement hall is referred to as “mochitama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited at the amusement hall is referred to as “stored ball”. say. The difference between "Pentama" and "Mochitama" is the number of balls that have been deposited into the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing into the amusement hall, or the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the amusement hall Because of this difference, “mochitama” may be managed by the possession management computer 8 installed in the store.

  In this embodiment, the stored ball data is not directly recorded on the member card, but is stored in association with the member card number in the possession management computer 8 installed in the store so that the corresponding stored ball can be searched based on the member card number. It is configured. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the possession management computer 8 in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the possession balls may be stored in the possession management computer 8 in association with the card numbers.

  In addition, the timing which memorize | stores the ball in a card | curd (member card, visitor card) or the ball management computer 8 is good also as a timing whenever a count button is operated and count processing is performed, or as a timing for every fixed time It is also possible to return the card.

  When the player finishes the game and receives a card return from the card unit 3, the ball stored in the card unit 3 is temporarily stored in the ball management computer 8 as a stored ball, and the player When the card is inserted again into the same or another card unit 3 on the same day as when the card was returned, only the possession balls for that day that were once stored as stored balls are again stored in the card unit 3, The game balls may be added within the range of the possession balls so that the game can be played.

  In addition, a setting changeover switch 360 is connected to the control unit 300. The setting changeover switch is a switch for the store manager and the store clerk to perform the first operation of the volume and the light amount, and the configuration thereof is the same as that of the setting changeover switch 460 described in the first embodiment. Is omitted. The control unit 300 is configured to be able to directly or indirectly specify the channel of the setting changeover switch 360 via a signal output from the setting changeover switch 360 or a predetermined circuit.

  In addition, a sound output control board 319 is connected to the control unit 300. The sound output control board 319 is connected to the sound output unit 350 and controls to output a sound such as a specific sound or a confirmation sound from the sound output unit 350 according to the control of the control unit 300.

[2-5. Functional configuration of Mochitama management computer]
FIG. 50 is a diagram illustrating an example of a functional configuration of the possession management computer 8.
The possession management computer 8 includes a processing unit 810, an input unit 820, a display unit 830, a communication unit 840, a clock unit 850, and a storage unit 860.

  The processing unit 810 is a control device and an arithmetic device that comprehensively control each unit of the possession management computer 8 according to various programs such as a system program stored in the storage unit 860. The processing unit 810 is a processor such as a CPU or DSP or an ASIC. And so on.

  The input unit 820 is an input unit configured to include, for example, a keyboard and a mouse, and outputs a pressed key or button signal (operation signal) to the processing unit 810.

  The display unit 830 is a display device that performs various displays based on a display control signal output from the processing unit 810, and includes an LCD or the like. The display unit 830 displays data contents of various databases stored in the storage unit 860.

  The communication unit 840 is a communication device for performing communication with the card unit 3 and includes, for example, a wired communication module that performs communication via a wired cable. The communication unit 840 receives card information from the card unit 3.

  The clock unit 850 is an internal clock included in the holding ball management computer 8 and includes, for example, a crystal oscillator including a crystal resonator and an oscillation circuit. The time measured (including date) of the clock unit 850 is output to the processing unit 810 as needed.

  The storage unit 860 stores a ball management program 861, member management data 863, card management data 865, and unit management data 867 that are executed as a ball management process by the processing unit 810.

FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of the data configuration of the member management data 863.
The member management data 863 stores member information data and member game history data. The member information data stores member personal information. Specifically, for example, a member ID for uniquely identifying a member, a personal identification number set by the member, a visit point given to the member every time the store is visited, and a store point The rank set for the member, the last name of the member, and the name of the member are stored.

  In the member game history data, a member ID, a visit date, a machine number, a model name, a start time, and an end time are stored in association with each other. The start time is the time when the member starts playing the game with the pachinko machine 2 with the serial number. The end time is the time when the member ends the game with the pachinko machine 2 with the serial number.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the card management data 865.
The card management data 865 stores member card management data and visitor card management data.

  The membership card management data is data for managing the membership card. For example, the card ID for uniquely identifying the membership card, the membership ID, the number of possessed balls, the number of stored balls, and the number of jackpots correspond to each other. It is memorized.

  Visitor card management data is data for managing visitor cards. For example, the card ID for making the visitor card unique, the latest issue date and time that is the latest issue date and time of the visitor card, the number of possessions The number of jackpots is stored in association with each other.

[2-6. Process flow]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of main processing executed by the processing unit 310 of the card unit 3 in accordance with the main program 321 stored in the ROM 320.

  The processing unit 310 establishes communication with the hall computer 6 (G1) and requests the hall computer 6 to transmit setting data related to the card unit 3 (G3). Then, the processing unit 310 receives the volume setting data 693 and stores it in the RAM 330 (G5), and also receives the light amount setting data 695 and stores it in the RAM 330 (G7).

  Next, the processing unit 310 performs a volume initial setting process for initially setting the volume of sound output from the sound output unit 450 (G9). In addition, the processing unit 310 performs light amount initial setting processing for initially setting the light amount emitted from the effect lamp and the decoration LED (G11). The volume initial setting process and the light intensity initial setting process are the same as the volume initial setting process and the light intensity initial setting process described in the first embodiment.

  Next, the processing unit 310 starts executing card unit processing in accordance with the card unit processing program 321a stored in the ROM 320 (G13). The card unit process is continuously executed until the main process ends.

  Thereafter, the specific sound output control unit 310e starts executing the sound output process (G15). The sound output process is continuously executed until the main process ends. In the sound output process, the sound output unit 350 is controlled to output the sound of forgetting to remove the card as a specific sound at a predetermined timing. The timing for outputting the sound of forgetting to remove the card may be, for example, the timing when it is determined that the game by the player has ended. In this case, in determining whether or not the player's game has ended, for example, (A) when there is no game signal input from the pachinko machine 2 for a certain period of time, What is necessary is just to determine with the game by a player having been complete | finished when not made.

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not to end the processing (G17). For example, when an operation to turn off the power of the card unit 3 is performed, it is determined that the process is to be ended. If it determines with continuing a process (G17; No), the process part 310 will wait as it is. If it is determined that the process is to be terminated (G17; Yes), the main process is terminated.

54 and 55 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of card unit processing.
First, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a card return operation has been performed (H1). If it is determined that a card return operation has been performed (H1; Yes), a card return process is performed (H3). Specifically, a process of discharging the inserted card to the card return slot is performed. Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H21.

  If it is determined that the card return operation has not been performed (H1; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the holding ball summing operation has been performed (H5), and if it is determined that it has been performed (H5; Yes), Mochitama total processing is performed (H7). Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H21.

  If it is determined that the holding ball summing operation has not been performed (H5; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a card lock operation has been performed (H9). If it is determined that the card locking operation has been performed (I9; Yes), Card lock processing is performed (H11). Specifically, the inserted card is locked so as not to be returned only by pressing the card return button 312. After the lock, for example, the player is requested to input a password, and the card is not returned to the player unless the correct password is input. Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H21.

  If it is determined that the card lock operation has not been performed (H9; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the ball split operation has been performed (H13), and if it has been determined (H13; Yes), Mochitama split processing is performed (H15). Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H21.

  If it is determined that the holding ball split operation has not been performed (H13; No), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not an information inquiry operation has been performed (H17). If it is determined that the information inquiry operation has been performed (H17; Yes), Information inquiry processing is performed (H19). Specifically, in accordance with the player's operation, information such as the prepaid balance (payment balance), the number of balls held, the number of balls stored, etc. is displayed on the display unit 355. Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H21.

  In H21, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a replay operation has been performed by pressing the replay button 316c by the player (H21). If it is determined that the replay operation has been performed (H21; Yes), the specified number A ball payout control process for paying back the game balls to the player is performed (H23). Then, the processing unit 310 updates the possessed ball number data 331 (H25), and updates the display of the possessed ball number displayed on the display unit 355 (H27).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the ball counting result is input from the counting payout unit 380 (H29), and if it is determined that it is input (H29; Yes), the possessed ball number data 331 is updated ( H31), the display of the number of possessed balls displayed on the display unit 355 is updated (H33).

Next, the sound volume setting unit 310b performs sound volume setting processing.
Specifically, the sound volume setting unit 310b determines whether or not a display operation for a sound volume change screen has been performed (H35). If it is determined that the operation has been performed (H35; Yes), the sound volume change screen is displayed. A volume change screen display process to be displayed on 355 is executed (H37).

  Thereafter, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a volume change operation has been performed (H39). If it is determined that the volume change operation has been performed (H39; Yes), the volume change process is performed according to the volume change process program 321c stored in the ROM 320. Execute (H41).

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a light amount changing operation has been performed (H43). If it is determined that the light amount changing operation has been performed (H43; Yes), the light amount changing process is performed according to the light amount changing process program 321d stored in the ROM 320. Execute (H45).

  Thereafter, the sound volume setting unit 310b determines whether or not a sound volume change screen is being displayed on the display unit 355 (H47), and if it is determined that it is being displayed (H47; Yes), the sound volume change or the like is changed. It is determined whether or not an operation for terminating the display of the screen has been performed (H49). If it is determined that the change has been made (H49; Yes), control is performed so as to end the display of the screen for changing the displayed volume etc. (H51). Then, the volume setting unit 310b ends the volume setting process.

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the ball counting result is not input from the counting payout unit 380 (H53), and if it is determined that the input is not input (H53; Yes). The possessed ball special display processing unit 310a executes the possessed ball special display processing according to the possessed ball special display processing program 321b stored in the ROM 320 (H55). Then, the processing unit 310 ends the card unit process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the running ball summing process.
The possession ball summing process is a process of summing up the possession balls associated with a plurality of cards and associating them with one card.

  The processing unit 310 determines whether or not a membership card is being accepted (J3). When the membership card is being accepted (J3; Yes), the processing unit 310 instructs the input of a personal identification number (J5). Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the collation result is OK (J7). If it is OK (J7; Yes), the processing unit 310 determines whether or not the membership card has a ball (J9). ).

  If it is determined that there is a holding ball (J9; Yes), the processing unit 310 invalidates the visitor card at the reading position of the card reader / writer 327 and discharges the membership card (J11). Then, the processing unit 310 instructs the player to insert a membership card or a visitor card (J13).

  Next, the processing unit 310 determines whether or not a card is inserted within a predetermined time (J15), and if it is determined that the card is inserted (J15; Yes), the holding ball is transferred to the inserted card (J17). . Then, the processing unit 310 transmits the card information of the inserted card to the possession management computer 8 (J19), and then ejects the inserted card (J21). And the process part 310 complete | finishes the holding ball total process.

  When the determination result of J3, J7, J9, or J15 is a negative determination, the processing unit 310 performs error notification (J23). And the process part 310 complete | finishes the holding ball total process.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the possession ball dividing process.
The internal ball splitting process is a process of splitting the internal ball of one card (dividing source card) and associating it with a plurality of cards. In the present embodiment, some of the possessed balls of the accepted membership cards (hereinafter referred to as “dividing source cards”) are referred to as other new visitor cards (hereinafter referred to as “dividing destination cards”). ), And the remaining possession balls are left on the original card.

  First, the processing unit 310 instructs to input a personal identification number (K3). Next, it is determined whether or not the collation result is OK (K5), and if it is determined that it is OK (K5; Yes), whether or not the holding ball is more than twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount. Is determined (K7). When the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the lending unit amount (K7; No), since it is usually not possible to pay out the possessed balls, the number of possessed balls is combined with the amount of the card to be divided. Need to be at least twice the number corresponding to the lending unit amount.

  If it determines with it being 2 times or more (K7; Yes), the process part 310 will display-control the screen for inputting the number of balls to divide | segment (K9). The number of divisions can be selected from choices, or can be input by increasing or decreasing the number of units corresponding to the lending unit amount by operating the increase or decrease button, or a numerical value can be directly input You may do it.

  The processing unit 310 waits until the number of divisions is input (K11; No). If it is determined that the number is input (K11; Yes), the processing unit 310 determines whether the member card is being accepted (K13). If it is determined that the membership card is being received (K13; Yes), the processing unit 310 subtracts the number of divisions from the number of possessed balls (K15).

  Next, the processing unit 310 discharges the membership card (K17). Next, the processing unit 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit provided in the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs the issue processing of the taken out visitor card (K19). Specifically, the status of the visitor saving management table of the possession management computer 8 is changed during use, the latest issue date is updated, and the latest issue date of the visitor saving management table of the possession management computer 8 is updated. Reset other items in both tables.

  Then, the processing unit 310 associates the number of divisions with the visitor card as the number of balls (K21). Specifically, the number of divisions is stored as the number of balls in the visitor saving management table of the ball management computer 8. Next, the processing unit 310 discharges the visitor card (K23).

  Next, the processing unit 310 informs the user that the member card that has been ejected is urged to be reinserted (K25). The processing unit 310 waits until the membership card is inserted (K27; Yes), and if inserted (K27; Yes), transmits the card information to the possession management computer 8 (K41). And the process part 310 complete | finishes the possession ball division | segmentation process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the membership card is not being accepted (K13; No), the processing unit 310 temporarily saves the card information of the accepted visitor card in another memory area (K29). Then, the processing unit 310 resets the card information of the visitor card at the reading / writing position being accepted and performs the issuing process (K31). Next, the processing unit 310 records the number of divisions as the number of balls on the visitor card (K33), and discharges the visitor card (K35).

  Next, the processing unit 310 takes out the visitor card from the card storage unit of the card reader / writer to the reading position, and performs a process for issuing the taken out visitor card (K37). Then, the processing unit 310 records the card information saved in K29 on the visitor card (K39). Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to K41.

[2-7. Display screen]
FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the liquid crystal display 313 constituting the display unit 355 of the card unit 3.

  In FIG. 58 (1), the liquid crystal display 313 displays a special possessed ball display corresponding to the number of possessed balls of the player and the number of possessed balls. At the bottom of the display unit 355, a menu button 316a, a table data button 316b, a replay button 316c, a volume / light quantity change button 316d, and a cross button 316e including up / down / left / right keys and an enter button are provided. ing.

  The possessed ball special display is a special display corresponding to the player's possessed ball, and in this figure, a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image. Since the display method of these images is the same as that in the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted. The display modes of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image are not limited to this, and various display modes as shown in FIGS. 35 to 37 in the first embodiment can be applied. The number of possessed balls is the current number of possessed balls of the player, and is updated and displayed in real time based on the count result output from the count payout unit 380 and the number of payouts paid out by the player.

  When the volume / light quantity change button 316d is pressed, the display screen of FIG. 58 (1) is switched to the display screen of FIG. 58 (2). On the display screen of FIG. 58 (2), a volume change screen, which is a screen for changing the volume / light quantity, is popped up on the possessed ball special display screen. A screen similar to the volume etc. changing screen described in the first embodiment can be applied to the volume etc. changing screen, and the player operates the left and right keys of the cross button 316e to select the volume and the amount of light, and the enter button By pressing, the volume and the amount of light can be changed.

[2-8. Effect]
The second gaming system 1B is a type of gaming device, recording medium processing device, and counting device corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 that is a type of gaming machine that uses a game ball that is a type of gaming medium. A card unit 3 is provided.

  The card unit 3 includes an operation button 316, a sound output unit 350, a volume setting unit 310b for setting the volume of a specific sound output from the sound output unit 350, and a volume set by the volume setting unit 310b. When the operation button 316 is operated, a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set by the volume setting unit 310b is sounded when the operation button 316 is operated. And a confirmation sound output control unit 310f that outputs from the output unit 350. The volume setting unit 310b can set the volume within a volume changeable range included in the volume setting data 693, and the confirmation sound output control unit 310f can change the volume set by the volume setting unit 310b. When the operation button 316 is operated to change the volume outside the limit of the volume changeable range when the volume is within the limit of the possible range, a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume of the limit of the volume changeable range Is output from the sound output unit 350.

  According to this, when an operation for changing the volume exceeding the predetermined range is performed in the card unit 3, a confirmation sound having a volume corresponding to the limit volume exceeding the predetermined range is output. It is possible to make the store visitor recognize that the volume is to be changed beyond the threshold.

  The card unit 3 includes a display unit 355 that can display an image, and a counting payout unit 380 that can count the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with the pachinko machine 2. Further, the card unit 3 receives signals relating to the game such as a big hit signal, a probable change signal, a time short / medium signal, a driving signal, a prize ball signal, and a start signal from the pachinko machine 2. Then, the processing unit 310 of the card unit 3 updates (adds) the possessed ball number data when the number of game balls won during the big hit is input as a counting result from the counting payout unit 380, and the replay button When is pressed, the possessed ball number data is updated (subtracted).

  The display control board 329 includes a display control process for displaying the first predetermined image on the display unit 355 when the number of possessed balls counted by the counting payout unit 380 reaches the first display threshold value, If the number of possessed balls has reached a first non-display threshold that is a predetermined number of times smaller than the first display threshold when a predetermined image is displayed, the first predetermined image is not hidden and the first non-display threshold is set. When it falls below, the non-display control process for making the first predetermined image non-display is executed.

  According to this, the number of balls possessed by a player who plays with a gaming machine is counted by the counting and payout unit 380, and the first predetermined image is displayed on the display unit 355 based on the counted number of possessed balls. An intuitive and easy-to-understand display showing the number of possessed balls can be realized. In addition, the first non-display threshold for hiding the first predetermined image is smaller by a predetermined number than the first display threshold for displaying the first predetermined image. By providing the threshold difference for the predetermined number, it is possible to prevent the display / non-display of the predetermined image from being switched due to an increase or decrease in the number of possessed balls just before the threshold.

[2-9. Modified example]
[2-9-1. Volume settings]
59 and 60 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the flow of the second card unit process executed by the processing unit 310 of the card unit 3 in place of the card unit process of FIGS. 54 and 55. Note that the same steps as those in the card unit process are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in H29 that the ball counting result has been input from the counting payout unit 380 (H29; Yes), the processing unit 310 controls the display unit 355 to display the counting screen (L30). Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H31.

After H33, the sound volume setting unit 310b executes a second sound volume setting process.
In the second sound volume setting process, if it is determined that the display operation of the sound volume change screen has been performed in H35 (H35; Yes), the sound volume setting unit 310b determines whether or not the counting screen is being displayed. (L36).

If it is determined that the counting screen is being displayed (L36; Yes), the sound volume setting unit 310b performs a sound volume change restriction notification process for notifying that the change of the sound volume / light quantity is restricted ( L38). The same process as the volume change change notification process described in the first embodiment can be applied to the volume change change notification process. Then, the processing unit 310 moves the process to H47.
The other steps are the same as the sound volume setting process in the card unit process.

FIG. 61 (1) is a diagram showing an example of the counting screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 313 that constitutes the display unit 355 of the card unit 3.
The liquid crystal display 313 displays a counting screen in which the characters “counting” are displayed in the center of the screen. When the volume / light quantity change button 316d is pressed while the counting screen is displayed, a volume etc. change restriction screen as shown in FIG. 61 (2) is displayed.

  In FIG. 61 (2), a balloon displaying a display message “The volume / light quantity cannot be changed because the current counting is in progress” is pop-up displayed in the center of the screen of the liquid crystal display 313. By this display, the player can recognize that the change in volume / light quantity is restricted while counting the number of possessed balls.

[2-9-2. Channel settings]
As described in the modification of the first embodiment, the channel setting may be transmitted from the hall computer 6 to the card unit 3. Specifically, channel settings may be transmitted to the card unit 3 in individual units or group units. As described above, the group unit can be a type unit of the pachinko machine 2 or a game island unit in which the pachinko machine 2 is installed, and the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2 in these group units. The channel setting may be transmitted to.

  Further, it may be possible to set on the store side which of the channel setting transmitted from the hall computer 6 and the channel setting by the setting changeover switch 360 has priority. When priority is given to the channel setting transmitted from the hall computer 6, the channel setting by the setting changeover switch 360 may be disabled. In this case, the setting by the hall computer 6 is replaced with the first setting. On the other hand, when priority is given to the channel setting by the setting changeover switch 360, the channel setting may not be transmitted from the hall computer 6 to the card unit 3. In this case, the setting by the setting changeover switch 360 is the first setting.

  In addition, said structure is good also as applying to both a volume and a light quantity, and good also as applying only about either one of a volume and a light quantity.

[2-9-2. Special possession ball display processing]
In the ball totaling process and the ball splitting process executed by the card unit 3, an exceptional process related to the possessed ball special display may be performed. Specifically, for example, when the possessed ball is divided by the possessed ball splitting process, the possession recorded on the original card based on the possessed ball number (the number of possessed balls) recorded on the card before the splitting. The number of images displayed in the number of spheres and the number of images displayed in the number of possessed spheres recorded on the card at the division destination may be determined.

For example, it is assumed that the number of possessed balls is 3100 and the player divides this into 1900 and 1200 shots. It is assumed that the number of possessed balls recorded on the division source card is 1900 and the number of retained balls recorded on the division destination card is 1200. According to the possessed ball special display process, when the number of possessed balls is 3100, the number of first predetermined images displayed is 3. Therefore, for example, the display number of the first predetermined image is distributed so that the sum of the display numbers of the first predetermined image is 3 between the division source card and the division destination card. Specifically, the number of held balls is 1900 for the split source card, but the display number of the first predetermined image in this case is exceptionally 2 and the number of held balls is 1200 for the split destination card. Therefore, as a general rule, the display number of the first predetermined image is set to 1.
The same applies to the second predetermined image.

  As a specific process, the display number of a predetermined image (hereinafter referred to as “total display number”) is determined based on the number of possessed balls recorded on the card before division. Then, when the possession ball division is performed, the number of possession balls recorded on each card is based on the possession ball number recorded on the division source card and the possession ball number recorded on the division destination card. The display counter value is determined.

  Display counter value corresponding to the number of possessed balls of the division source card (hereinafter referred to as “division source card display counter value”) and display counter value corresponding to the number of possession balls of the division destination card (hereinafter referred to as “division destination card display”). In the case where the sum of the counter value and the total display number is the same, the predetermined image is displayed based on the display counter value as it is. On the other hand, when the sum of the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value is different from the above total display number, the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value are compensated so as to compensate for the difference. Either one of them is corrected. This display counter value correction processing is performed for each of the first display counter value and the second display counter value.

  In this case, it is preferable to record the division source card display counter value and the division destination card display counter value on the division source card and the division destination card, respectively. By doing in this way, when a player moves to another pachinko machine 2 and plays a game, the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the destination pachinko machine 2 is recorded on the received card. Based on the display counter value, the number of predetermined images to be displayed can be determined.

  Further, when the possessed ball summing process is performed, the processing unit 310 of the card unit 3 performs the possessed ball special display process based on the number of possessed balls recorded on the accepted card, and performs the first display. A counter value and a second display counter value may be set, and a predetermined image may be displayed based on these counter values.

  In addition, as with the ball splitting process, the display counter value corresponding to the number of possessed balls in the ball holding total process is recorded on the card, and the player moves to another pachinko machine 2 and plays a game. In this case, the card unit 3 provided corresponding to the destination pachinko machine 2 may determine the number of predetermined images to be displayed based on the display counter value recorded on the received card.

[3. Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 2 in which the player has played is displayed on the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 described in the first embodiment. (1) The only game model in which the player has played a game, (2 ) A long game machine in which the player's game time is longer than the first predetermined time; (3) the first game machine in which the player first played; (4) the player's game time longer than the second predetermined time; This is an embodiment in which information related to a total result of which one of one or more gaming models of short short-time gaming machines is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 described in the first embodiment displays the number of times that the game ball has passed through the first area of the game area in the game with the pachinko machine 2 and This is an embodiment in which information on the total result obtained by counting the ratio and the number of times and / or the ratio that the game ball has passed through the second area of the game area according to the launch intensity of the game ball is displayed.

  The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 determines the game model that the player has played based on the card information recorded on the membership card inserted in the card unit 3 provided in the pachinko machine 2. Although illustration is omitted, in the card information, the game time of the player in the pachinko machine 2 is recorded for each ID of the pachinko machine 2 in association with the member ID. The game time includes a game start time at which a game on the pachinko machine 2 is started and a game end time at which a game on the pachinko machine 2 is ended. Based on these game times, the processing unit 410 determines which of the above game models (1) to (4) the game model played by the player is.

  An example of a game model determination method will be described. If only one pachinko machine 2 is played by a member with the member ID, the pachinko machine 2 with that machine number is determined to be the only game machine. Among the pachinko machines 2 in which the member of the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 having a machine number that is longer than the first predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) is calculated as the time from the game start time to the game end time. Judged as a long-running game model. Among the pachinko machines 2 in which the member of the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 having a machine number shorter than the second predetermined time (for example, 15 minutes) is calculated as the time from the game start time to the game end time. It is determined as a short-time gaming machine. In addition, among the pachinko machines 2 in which the member with the member ID has played, the pachinko machine 2 with the oldest game number is determined as the first game model.

  Based on the game model determination result, the processing unit 410 tabulates which game model the game model played by the player is, and stores the tabulation result in a database. Then, the processing unit 410 graphs, for example, the game models so that surrounding players can easily see the game models based on the total results of the game models stored in the database, and displays the created graph on the second display unit 440. To control.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In FIG. 62 (1), the second display unit 440 displays a pie chart (the model-specific long-time game model ratio pie chart) that indicates the percentage that the pachinko machine 2 has been played by the player as a long-time game model. . FIG. 62 (2) shows a percentage of the pachinko machine 2 played by a player as a long-time game model (a long-term game model ratio bar graph by model) instead of the pie chart. A long-running game model ratio bar graph is displayed on the second display unit 440. By performing the graph display as described above on the second display unit 440, the surrounding players can know the proportion of games played for a long time on the pachinko machine 2.

  The above is an example of a display screen of a pie chart and a bar graph created for a long-time game model. You may make it display on 2 display part 440. FIG. By performing such a display, the surrounding players can know the rate at which the pachinko machine 2 is the only game, the first game, or the short game. It can be seen that the pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of long-time games is a popular model, and the only pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of games is a very popular model. It can also be seen that the pachinko machine 2 with a high percentage of short-time games is a less popular model. Thereby, the surrounding player can judge a popular game model and a non-popular game model, and can refer to it when selecting the model to play.

FIG. 63 is a diagram showing another example of the display screen of the second display unit 440.
In FIG. 63 (1), for the model A of the pachinko machine 2, a pie chart showing the determination result of the game model in which the player played is displayed on the second display unit 440. Specifically, for model A, the ratio of the player playing the first game, the ratio of playing for a short time, the ratio of playing for a long time, and the ratio of playing a single game are shown in a pie chart format.

This is shown in FIG. 63 (2) in the form of a bar graph. For model A, the percentage of players who played the game for the first time, the percentage of games played for a short time, the percentage of games played for a long time, and the percentage of games played alone. It is displayed on the second display unit 440 in a bar graph format.
By performing such display, the surrounding players can know the percentage of the pachinko machine 2 that has been played as the only gaming model, long-time gaming model, first gaming model, and short-time gaming model. It can be determined whether the machine 2 is a popular model or an unpopular model.

  In the present embodiment, the launching device provided in the pachinko machine 2 has a launch intensity sensor that detects the launch intensity of the game ball, and the launch intensity sensor detects the launch intensity of the game ball launched from the launch apparatus. To do. Then, a launch intensity signal indicating the detected launch intensity is output to the data display device 4. In addition, the pachinko machine 2 indicates that the game ball has passed through the winning opening when the gaming ball driven into the gaming area passes through each winning opening (normal winning opening, starting winning opening, and big winning opening). The area signal is output to the data display device 4. At this time, the pachinko machine 2 outputs the passing intensity signal of the game ball in association with the passing area signal.

  The data display device 4 determines the launch intensity and the pass area of the game ball based on the launch intensity signal and the pass area signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Based on the determination result, the number and / or rate of game balls passing through the first region of the game area, and the number and / or rate of game balls passing through the second region of the game region, Are counted according to the launch intensity of the game ball. Here, in the first area and the second area, various winning holes (ordinary winning opening, starting winning opening, large winning opening) for winning game balls, and divided driving areas (right hitting) in the gaming area are included. Area, left-handed area, and inset area).

FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table configuration of a firing intensity threshold range table used by the processing unit 410 to determine in which driving area a game ball has been shot according to the shooting strength.
In the firing strength threshold range table, a driving area and a firing strength threshold range are stored in association with each other. The driving area is divided into, for example, a “right hitting area”, a “left hitting area”, and a “bumping area”. Here, the “right hit area” is an area on the right side of the game area, and the “left hit area” is an area on the left side of the game area. Further, the “bumping area” is an area in which the game ball is likely to flow toward the start winning opening when the game ball is driven into this area.

  The firing intensity threshold range includes a firing intensity threshold range AR (lower limit value ARlow to upper limit value ARhi) for the right strike area, and a firing intensity threshold range AL (lower limit value ALlow to upper limit value ALhi) for the left strike area. The firing intensity threshold range AB (lower limit value ABlow to upper limit value ABhi) is defined for each of the bump regions.

  The processing unit 410 adds up the total number of shots and the total shot ratio based on the launch intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Further, by determining which launch intensity threshold range of the launch intensity threshold range table the launch intensity specified from the launch intensity signal is included, the game ball driving area is determined. Then, based on the determination result, the total number of driving and the total driving ratio are tabulated for each driving area.

FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating an example of the data configuration of the passage area data classified by the firing intensity collected by the processing unit 410.
The passing area data by firing intensity is data of the result of counting the passing areas of game balls by firing intensity, and the pachinko machine ID is associated with the passing area of game balls, the total number of passes, and the number of passes by launch intensity. The number-of-passage data by launch intensity and the pass ratio data by launch intensity in which the pass area of the game ball, the total passage ratio, and the pass ratio by launch intensity are associated with each other are stored.

  In the passage area, a first start winning port, a second starting winning port, a third starting winning port, a first normal winning port, a second normal winning port, a third normal winning port and a large winning port are defined. In addition, the big prize opening includes a probability variation prize opening. Based on the launch intensity signal and the passage area signal output from the pachinko machine 2 for each prize opening, the total number of passages by passage area, the number of passages by launch intensity, the total passage ratio and the passage ratio by launch intensity are tabulated. It memorize | stores in the passage area data according to firing intensity.

  In the present embodiment, for each pachinko machine 2, it will be described that both the number of passages by launch intensity and the passage ratio by launch intensity are tabulated, but only one of these may be tabulated. Good. That is, only the number of passages by firing intensity may be counted, or only the passage ratio by firing strength may be counted.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of the data configuration of the shot area data by firing intensity tabulated by the processing unit 410.
The shot area by shot strength data is the data of the results of game ball shot areas by shot intensity, and the pachinko machine ID, game ball shot area, total shot number and shot number by shot strength. And the number-of-shots-by-fire-intensity data, and game-injection-by-intensity-by-launch-rate data by associating the game ball-injection area, the total-injection-ratio, and the invocation-by-intensity-by-launch ratio.

  The driving area includes the right hit area, the left hit area, and the hit area described above. For each driving area, the processing unit 410 counts the total driving number and the total driving ratio based on the launch intensity signal output from the pachinko machine 2. Also, by determining which launch intensity threshold range of the launch intensity threshold range table the launch intensity specified from the launch intensity signal is determined, the game ball driving area is determined, and the determination result is Based on the driving area, the number of driving shots by firing strength and the driving rate by shooting strength are tabulated.

  In the present embodiment, each pachinko machine 2 is described as counting up both the number of shots by launch strength and the shot ratio by launch strength. However, only one of these is tabulated. May be. That is, only the number of shots by firing strength may be counted, or only the shot ratio by firing strength may be tabulated.

  For example, the processing unit 410 makes it easy for the surrounding players to visually recognize the passing area for each launch strength of the game ball based on the result of counting the passing areas for each launch strength (including the driving area). A control is performed to graph and display the created graph on the second display unit 440.

FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In FIG. 67 (1), the second display unit 440 displays a pie chart showing the percentage of winning to the start winning opening for each firing intensity. Specifically, the ratio indicating the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is represented by the firing strength “T0 to T9” to the firing strength “T90 to T99”.

  This is shown in a bar graph format in FIG. 67 (2), and a bar graph showing the percentage of winning to the start winning opening for each firing intensity is displayed on the second display unit 440. By performing such a display, players other than the player tend to pass through which region the game ball passes depending on the launch strength, and how much handle operation is performed to win the game ball at the start winning opening. It is possible to grasp what can be done.

  In addition, you may make it display on the 2nd display part 440 in the form of a graph the information regarding the number and ratio of the game ball which won not the start winning opening but the normal winning opening according to discharge intensity. In addition, information relating to the game balls and percentages that have been won in the big winning opening and the probability variation winning opening for each firing intensity may be displayed on the second display unit 440 in a graph format. Thereby, the surrounding game players can grasp how much the handle operation is performed so that the game ball can be won in the normal winning opening, the big winning opening, or the probability changing winning opening.

  In the present embodiment, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 has been described as counting game models. However, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 may perform counting of game models. In this case, the hall computer 6 may store the aggregation results in a database, and transmit the aggregation result data stored in the database to the data display device 4. Moreover, you may make it the coin management computer 8 totalize a game model. In addition, a member management computer that manages the member card may be installed in the store separately from the hall computer 6 and the possession management computer 8, and the member management computer may count the game models.

  Further, a computer having two or three functions among the hall computer 6, the ball management computer 8, and the member management computer may count the game models. That is, (1) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8, (2) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the member management computer, and (3) the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer. (4) Any one of the computers having the functions of the hall computer 6, the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer may count the game models.

  The same applies to the summation of the passage areas according to the firing intensities, and the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 does not perform the summation of the passage areas according to the firing intensities. You may make it totalize another passage area. In this case, the pachinko machine 2 may output the above-described launch intensity signal and passage region signal to the hall computer 6.

[4. Other Embodiments]
Embodiments to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Hereinafter, other embodiments will be described. In addition, about the same structure as said each embodiment, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and description for the second time is abbreviate | omitted.

[4-1. Game machine]
[4-1-1. Enclosed pachinko machine]
In the above embodiment, the gaming machine according to the present invention has been described as a normal pachinko machine 2, but it goes without saying that the gaming machine is not limited to this. As described above, instead of the normal pachinko machine 2, a sealed pachinko machine may be used as the gaming machine according to the present invention.

FIG. 68 is a front view showing an example of the external configuration of the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B in this case.
Enclosed pachinko machine 2B is a main body of enclosed pachinko machine 2B, which is supported on a housing formed on the front surface and pivotally detachably supported on one side (left side of the housing). The upper front frame 30A provided with substantially all of the above, and the lower front frame positioned below the upper front frame 30A and pivotally supported on one side of the casing so as to be pivotable and detachable 30B and a display unit 60 disposed in front of the lower front frame 30B. In the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, the upper front frame 30A, the lower front frame 30B, and the display unit 60 constitute a front frame of the gaming machine. The upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are provided separately, and the upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are not limited to those in which the display unit 60 is disposed in front of the lower front frame 30B. The display unit 60 may be disposed on the front surface of the integrated single front frame, or instead of or in addition to the lower front frame 30B, the display unit 60 is disposed on the front surface of the upper front frame 30A. May be.

  The upper front frame 30A and the lower front frame 30B are separated from each other, and the upper front frame 30A has bearings 31a and 31b attached to one side up and down, and hinges (not shown) of the housing of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B. It is pivotally attached to the casing by being pivotally supported by the part. A game board (gauge board) 20 constituting a game board surface is detachably attached to the upper front frame 30A. The game board 20 is formed with a game area surrounded by guide rails and having a substantially circular outer edge. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 40A and a second special symbol display device 40B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 20 (for example, on the lower right edge of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 40A and the second special symbol display device 40B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”), which is a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 40A and the second special symbol display device 40B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do.

  A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 40A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 40B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 50 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 20. The image display device 50 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 50, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 40A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 40B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, in the display area of the image display device 50, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R are arranged. Then, in response to the start of any one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 40A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 40B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R, variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R in the image display device 50, A finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 50, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 40A or the special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 40B. In synchronism with the game, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (also simply referred to as “derivation”).

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese numerals). Or any combination of English characters, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, letters, symbols, and character images. Character images include, for example, people and animals, other objects, or It may be a decorative image showing a symbol such as a character or other arbitrary figure. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  After the decorative symbol variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R are displayed until the fixed decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. In FIG. 5, for example, scroll display is performed such that the symbol number sequentially flows from the top to the bottom from the smallest to the largest, and when the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, The decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is displayed. Alternatively, in at least any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbol number is scrolled from the largest to the smallest, and the symbol is displayed. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 50, a start winning storage display area 50H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 50H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) in an identifiable manner is performed. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is made by the game ball passing through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 60A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the presence or the enclosed pachinko machine 2B being controlled to the big hit game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Is done.

  Below the game area on the game board 20, an ordinary winning ball device 60A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 60B are provided. The normal winning ball device 60A forms, for example, a first start winning opening as a start area (first start area) that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B is an electric tulip-type accessory (ordinary electric accessory) having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a normal open state in a vertical position and an expanded open state in a tilt position by a solenoid (not shown). ) And a second start winning opening is formed in the start area (second start area).

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 60B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is normally open. On the other hand, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 60B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening (entrance) by tilting control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid for the ordinary electric accessory is in the on state. ) Easy to expand. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even when in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball device 60B may be configured so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port by, for example, closing the second starting winning port in the normally open state. As described above, the second start winning opening as the second start area includes an expanded open state in which game balls easily pass (enter) and a normal open state in which game balls are difficult to pass (enter) or cannot pass (enter). To change.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 60A and a second starting winning opening formed in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 60B is, for example, a first start opening switch (not shown) It is detected by the second start port switch. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, three) of the award balls is added to the current score, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined number. If the value is equal to or less than the upper limit value (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 3) of the award balls is added to the current score, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined number. If it is less than or equal to the upper limit value (for example, “4”), the second start condition is satisfied. The number of points given based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch and the number of points awarded based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch are the same number. It may be a different number.

  A special variable winning ball device 70 is provided below the normal winning ball device 60A and the normal variable winning ball device 60B. The special variable winning ball device 70 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid (not shown) for the large winning opening door. The special winning winning ball apparatus 70 is a large area as a specific area that is changed between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form a winning opening. Based on the fact that a game ball has been detected by the big prize opening switch that detects the winning of a game ball to the big prize opening, a score corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, 15) of prize balls is added to the current score. The Usually, the score given based on the winning of the game ball to the big winning opening is set higher than the points awarded based on the winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening.

  In order to play a game with the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, first, a point card made of an IC card is inserted into the card insertion slot 128 provided on the side of the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B. This point card can be purchased, for example, with a card vending machine installed in a game hall. The score card issued from the card vending machine includes a game hall code that can identify the game hall where the card is issued, identification information that can identify the score card from a plurality of score cards, and a score The card balance etc. in which the upper limit is determined according to the amount paid by the player at the time of card purchase are recorded.

  By inserting a point card into the card insertion slot 128 and pressing the ball lending switch, a predetermined number of points are awarded to the player in exchange for debiting a predetermined number of card balances from the card balance of the point card. . If the operation handle is operated in the state where the holding point exists, the hit ball (game medium) enclosed in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B is driven into the game area one by one by a not-shown hitting hammer. The shot balls that have been driven are detected one by one by a shot ball detector (not shown), and the score is decremented by one each time it is detected.

  The hit ball whose launch momentum is too weak to reach the game area is collected from the foul ball entrance and detected by a foul ball detector (not shown) provided on the back of the game board. Each time a foul ball is detected, one point is added and updated. Thereby, the score updated by subtraction can be effectively used again without obtaining an opportunity for the player's hit ball to reach the game area.

  In the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, a normal diagram for executing variable display of a normal symbol on a normal symbol display such that a game ball that has passed through a passing gate provided in the game area is detected by a gate switch (not shown). After the start condition is satisfied, the normal game with the normal symbol display device is executed based on the fact that the general map start condition for starting variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied, for example, that the previous normal game has ended. Be started.

  In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per normal figure”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  After the first start condition is satisfied, for example, in the previous time, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 60A is detected by a first start opening switch (not shown). Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, when the special game or the big hit gaming state is ended, the special game by the first special symbol display device 40A is started. In addition, after the second starting condition is satisfied, for example, when a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 60B is detected by a second starting opening switch (not shown), For example, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 40B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied due to, for example, the end of the previous special symbol game or the big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 40A or the second special symbol display device 40B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the variable as the special symbol variation time set every time the special symbol game is performed. When the display time elapses, a fixed special symbol (special symbol display result) that is a variable symbol display result is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, it becomes “small hit” as a predetermined display result. Further, if a special symbol different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol, the game is “lost”.

  After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the small hit game state is controlled as a special game state different from the big hit game state. In these big hit gaming state and small hit gaming state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 70 is controlled to be released a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds), thereby making it possible to win a gaming ball in the big winning opening. That is, an opportunity to increase the score is provided. However, in the case of a small hit or a predetermined type of big hit (for example, the above-mentioned latent probability variation big hit), the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short (for example, 0.5 seconds), so that it is practically impossible to expect winning in the big winning opening. It has become.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R provided in the image display device 50, a special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 40A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 40B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 50L, 50C, and 50R Then, in response to the variable display state of the decorative symbols becoming a predetermined reach state or the reach state, the display operation in the image display device 50, the sound output operation by the speakers 80L and 80R, the game effect lamp A lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as 90 performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach state.

  When ending the game, the player presses the settlement switch. As a result, game-possible points (game balls) are recorded on the score card as updated information. In addition, in the case where there are prize exchange points (prize reward balls) in addition to the gameable points, the information may be recorded on the points card.

  If the prize exchange points previously acquired in the game have already been recorded on the score card, the prize exchange points are added and updated. In the above, in addition to the card balance, a possible game score (game ball) and a prize exchange score (prize score) are recorded in the score card. The score card whose information has been rewritten is discharged from the card insertion slot 128.

  In the above-described encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, a game is played by holding points. Therefore, it is preferable to perform a possessed ball special display indicating the number of possessed balls of the player based on the player's points. In this case, the possessed ball special display can be displayed, for example, on the display unit 60 provided at the lower portion of the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B.

  Specifically, every time a shot ball is detected by the shot ball detector, the score is subtracted, and every time a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detector, the score is added at any time. Update. In addition, as described above, when a game ball wins a winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, or other general winning opening), it corresponds to winning in the winning opening The score is updated as needed by adding the score to the score. Then, the number of possessed balls is determined based on the current possessed point, and a threshold value determination is performed with respect to the determined possessed ball number to control display / non-display of the predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image).

  Instead of this, a threshold for the score is determined, and a threshold determination for the score is performed to display / hide a predetermined image (first predetermined image and second predetermined image) indicating the player's score. May be performed.

  The number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) counted by the inter-counter counting unit 5 of the first embodiment and the card unit 3 of the second embodiment is determined by detecting the game balls flowing into the counting payout unit 380 by the counting sensor. A detection signal of a predetermined pulse is output from the counting and payout unit 380 to the control unit 500 or the control unit 300 in response to detection of one game ball, and is stored in the control unit 500 or the control unit 300 accordingly. An example in which the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) increases by one has been described. That is, the example in which the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) immediately increases by 1 based on the detection of one game ball has been described.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and based on the fact that one game ball is detected, the number of possessed balls (number of possessed balls) is not immediately updated, and the “counted ball number” is temporarily updated (1 (1) The “counting ball number” did not increase within a predetermined period (for example, within 10 seconds), and (2) the increased “counting ball number” within the predetermined period becomes smaller than a predetermined value. (3) or based on a predetermined condition such as that the rate of increase of the “counting ball number” within a predetermined period is smaller than the predetermined rate, the “counting ball number” ) May be added.

  For example, in the big hit gaming state, the “counting ball number” increases within a predetermined period. Therefore, during the big hit gaming state (during the round), the number of possessed balls (the number of held balls) does not increase, and the “counting ball number” is The number increases to a number (for example, 1000 to 2000) according to the big hit type (period in which the big hit gaming state is controlled). Then, at the timing after the big hit gaming state is finished and the payout of the winning ball based on the winning in the big winning opening is finished, the “counting ball number” is added to the possessed ball number (the number of held balls). Become. In this case, the number of possessed balls (the number of possessed balls) changes rapidly, but it is possible to appropriately display the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image by the possessed ball special display process described above. Become.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned enclosed pachinko machine 2B is a gaming machine according to the present invention, a serial number ID is assigned to all enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in a wide-area store, which is different from the possessed ball special display. It is possible to construct a game system in which a predetermined management device (for example, the hall computer 6 installed in each store) manages and aggregates game information of all the enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in each store. is there. Here, the “wide area” can be, for example, a predetermined area (for example, an area by prefecture) or the whole country. In this case, the hall computer 6 installed in one store displays information related to the game in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B installed in another store on the data display device 4 installed in the own store. It is possible to construct a simple game system.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the third gaming system 1C in this case. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected about the same component as 1A of 1st game systems and 1B system 2B demonstrated in said embodiment, and description is abbreviate | omitted again.

  The third gaming system 1C includes a plurality of enclosed pachinko machines 2B, a data display device 4 provided corresponding to each enclosed pachinko machine 2B, and a hall computer 6 for each of a plurality of stores. The enclosed pachinko machine 2B and the data display device 4 are connected to the hall computer 6 via the base terminal 10. The hall computer 6 of each store is connected via a network N such as the Internet, and is configured to be able to send and receive information related to games in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B.

  In the present embodiment, the hall computer 6 includes a communication unit for communicating with the hall computer 6 in another store. The processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 transmits to the hall computer 6 of the other store via the communication unit, the own store game total data obtained by totaling the game results of the enclosed pachinko machines 2B installed in the own store. In addition, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 uses the hall computer 6 installed in another store to collect other store game total data obtained by tabulating the game results of each encapsulated pachinko machine 2B installed in the other store, Receive via. The own store game total data and the other store game total data are stored in the hard disk 680 as a database, for example.

  The processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 encloses the game total data for each model of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of its own store and other stores at a predetermined timing (for example, every time a predetermined time elapses). The data is transmitted to the data display device 4 provided corresponding to the pachinko machine 2B. Then, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 gives information related to the game in the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the own store and other stores to the second display unit 440 based on the game total data received from the hall computer 6. Control to display.

FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen displayed on the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 in this case.
In the second display section 440, for "Pachinko XXX" which is a model of the encapsulated pachinko machine 2B, the average number of big hits of our shop which is the average number of big hits of our own store and the average number of big hits of the store A which is another store are respectively It is displayed. Further, since the average number of jackpots of the store is larger than that of the store A, the message “Our store has more jackpots!” Is displayed. By performing such display, surrounding players can know the number of jackpots of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the other store, in addition to the number of jackpots of the enclosed pachinko machine 2B of the store, and at which store It is possible to grasp whether it is advantageous to play a game.

[4-1-2. Slot machine]
Further, instead of the pachinko machine 2 or the enclosed pachinko machine 2B, a slot machine that can be played using a game medal or an enclosed slot machine may be used as the gaming machine according to the present invention. When the gaming machine is a slot machine, depending on the number of medals possessed by the player, the possessed medal number special display process similar to the possessed ball special display process described in the above embodiment is performed, and the number of possessed medals The first predetermined image and the second predetermined image may be controlled to be displayed / hidden.

  In the slot machine, as advantageous states advantageous to the player, bonus (RB (regular bonus), BB (big bonus)) state and chance time (ART (assist replay time), AT (assist time) and RT (replay time) ) It is controlled to a state where a privilege for the player such as a state is given. For this reason, the state controlled by at least one of the bonus state and the chance time state is regarded as an advantageous state, and the same processing as in the above embodiment is performed to display the special medal number display.

  In this case, the data display device 4 of the first embodiment specifies the number of IN medals and the number of OUT medals based on the medal IN signal and the medal OUT signal, which are game signals output from the slot machine, and determines the number of IN medals and OUT. What is necessary is just to specify the number of possessed medals based on the number of medals. Further, the card unit 3 of the second embodiment is provided with a medal counting payout unit for counting and paying out the number of medals possessed by the player, and the number of medals possessed based on the counting result of the medal counting payout unit. Should be counted.

  If the predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the data display device 4 as described in the first embodiment, the inter-unit counting unit 5 sends a possessed medal number signal indicating the number of medal possessed by the player to the data display device 4. The processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 is configured to output the specified medal number of the player based on the possessed medal number signal output from the inter-counter counting unit 5, What is necessary is just to perform non-display control.

  If a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the card unit 3 as described in the second embodiment, the player is based on the counting result of the number of medals possessed by the counting payout unit 380 provided in the card unit 3. The number of possessed medals may be determined, and display control and non-display control of a predetermined image (or display control / non-display control of breakthrough display) may be performed.

  In this case, the first predetermined image can be a dollar box for a game medal into which a game medal acquired by the player is inserted, or can be a bulk of game medals loaded in one box. In addition, the second predetermined image can be a special box for game medals into which game medals acquired by the player are inserted, or the bulk of game medals loaded in another box.

  The first display threshold (first value) for displaying the first predetermined image and the first non-display threshold (second value) for non-displaying the first predetermined image are within a predetermined time range. The number of medals possessed can be determined based on the number. Specifically, when the number of game medals to be paid back to the player by one payout operation is 50, for example, 75 of which 50 has a margin of 25 is displayed as the first display threshold and the first display. The difference (first predetermined number) from the non-threshold value is used. For example, the first display threshold is set to 200, and the first non-display threshold is set to 125.

  Further, the second display threshold value is larger than the first display threshold value, and the difference (second predetermined number) between the second display threshold value and the second non-display threshold value is larger than the first predetermined number. A display threshold value and a second non-display threshold value are determined. For example, the second predetermined number is 150, the second display threshold is 1000, and the second non-display threshold is 850.

  When the gaming machine is a slot machine, the display contents of the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 include the model name of the slot machine, the start count, the bonus occurrence count (RB occurrence count, BB occurrence count), Information such as the number of privilege grants such as the chance time grant count (ART grant count, AT grant count, RT grant count), and the start history graph may be determined. Moreover, what is necessary is just to define information, such as vacant information, information during bonuses, information during privilege provision, as the display content of the 2nd display part 440. In addition, display contents related to specific effects (simultaneous effects) can be determined in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

  Further, the signal that can specify the number of possessed game media transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5 to the data display device 4 includes a possessed ball number signal indicating the player's possessed ball number, and a possessed medal indicating the player's possessed medal number. It is not limited to a few signals. Instead of these signals, a signal indicating the increase / decrease number of the game medium (game ball or game medal) (hereinafter referred to as “game medium increase / decrease signal”) may be transmitted to the data display device 4. In this case, the data display device 4 determines the number of possessed game media by updating the number of possessed balls and the number of possessed medals of the player based on the game media increase / decrease signal transmitted from the inter-counter counting unit 5. What should I do?

  The timing for outputting the signal that can specify the number of possessed game media is the timing for each predetermined time interval, the timing when the counting result of the counting payout unit 380 reaches the predetermined number, and the count of the counting payout unit 380. The count is determined when a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses from the end, and an intermittent timing such as a timing for waiting for the determination may be used. The design of the timing at which the signal is output can be appropriately changed. .

  In addition, regarding the display contents of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, the first display unit 430 displays information according to the type of the pachinko machine 2, and the second display unit 440 displays the information. Information that does not depend on the type of the pachinko machine 2 may be displayed. Information that does not depend on the type of the pachinko machine 2 includes information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine 2, such as during a big hit, during a probable change, in a vacant stand, the number of revolutions, the number of winnings, and the like. The first display unit 430 is controlled so as to display information depending on the type of the pachinko machine 2 such as latent probability variation information, time reduction information, suddenness information, and small hit information, and the second display unit 440 has a big hit. Control may be performed so as to display information that does not directly depend on the specifications of the pachinko machine, such as probability change, vacant stand, number of revolutions, number of winnings, and the like.

[4-2. Game equipment]
Instead of changing the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit 450 of the data display device 4 or changing the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit 350 of the card unit 3 as in the above embodiment. The sound output unit 750 is configured on the front surface of each counter 7 provided at the lower part of the pachinko machine 2 with respect to each pachinko machine 2, and the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit 750 can be changed. Good. The sound output unit 750 may output, as the specific sound, a sound for notifying that the user has forgotten to take a card or a sound indicating that the number of possessed balls is being counted.

  Rather than displaying a predetermined image (first predetermined image, second predetermined image) on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4 or the display unit 355 of the card unit 3, the pachinko machine corresponding to each pachinko machine 2 is displayed. 2, a display unit 730 may be configured on the front surface of each counter 7 provided at the lower part of the counter 2, and a predetermined spherical special display may be displayed on the display unit.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the display unit 730 provided in each counter counter 7 in this case.
Each counter 7 is provided in the lower part of the pachinko machine 2 and is configured to be able to count game balls discharged from the lower plate 24 of the pachinko machine 2. A display unit 730 is provided on the front surface of each counter, and the control unit of each counter 7 performs a possessed ball special display process similar to that of the above-described embodiment, and the display unit 730 has a first display. Control is performed to display the predetermined image and the second predetermined image.

  Further, the gaming device is not limited to the data display device 4, the card unit 3, and the individual counters 7, but the inter-counter counting unit 5 described in the first embodiment may be used as the gaming device according to the present invention. . In this case, a sound output unit may be provided in the inter-unit counting unit 5 so that a specific sound and a confirmation sound can be output from the sound output unit, and the volume / light quantity can be set or changed in the inter-unit counting unit 5. . Further, a setting changeover switch may be provided in the inter-unit counting unit 5 so that a store manager or an employee such as a store clerk can set the first volume level by a first operation on the setting changeover switch. In addition, an operation unit for changing the volume / light quantity may be provided in the inter-unit counting unit 5, and the second volume step may be set by a second operation on the operation unit.

  In addition, a display unit is provided in the inter-unit counting unit 5 to display a predetermined image indicating the number of possessed balls by the possessed ball special display described in the above embodiment. You may make it visually recognize.

  Further, the calling lamp device 9 described in the second embodiment may be a gaming device according to the present invention. In this case, a specific sound or a confirmation sound can be output from the sound output unit 950 of the calling lamp device 9, and the volume / light quantity can be set or changed in the calling lamp device 9. Further, a setting changeover switch may be provided in the calling lamp device 9 so that a store manager or a store clerk can set the first volume level by a first operation on the setting changeover switch. In addition, an operation unit for changing the volume / light quantity may be provided in the calling lamp device 9, and the second volume level may be set by a second operation on the operation unit.

  Further, by displaying a predetermined image indicating the number of possessed balls of the player by the special possessed ball display described in the above embodiment on the display unit 930 of the calling lamp device 9, the player can visually recognize the number of possessed balls. You may make it make it.

  In addition, a kiosk device, which is a type of information terminal provided in a store where a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine 2 or a slot machine is installed and configured to allow a player to check the layout and event information in the store, A gaming device according to the present invention may be used.

  In the above embodiment, the touch panel 421 is provided on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4, and the player calls the store clerk or selects a menu by tapping the screen with a finger. However, instead of the touch panel 421, a call button or a menu selection button may be provided on the housing, and the player may call the store clerk or select a menu by pressing the call button or the menu selection button.

  In the above embodiment, the second display unit 440 is provided on each of the left and right sides of the first display unit 430. However, the second display unit 440 may be provided on only one of the left and right sides. . Further, the second display portion 440 may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A instead of being provided so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage. Also in this case, the second display unit 440 may be provided on both the left and right side surfaces, or the second display unit 440 may be provided only on one of the left and right side surfaces.

  Moreover, in said embodiment, the angle of the 2nd display part 440 is changed relatively with respect to the 1st display part 430 by rotating the door part 4B by the hinge part 4C. However, it is also possible to adopt a fixed configuration in which the angle of the second display unit 440 does not change relative to the first display unit 430. In this case, the base portion 4A and the sub base portion are arranged so that the member forming the second display portion 440 (hereinafter referred to as “sub base portion”) has a predetermined opening angle with respect to the base portion 4A. What is necessary is just to comprise integrally.

  Specifically, the opening angle in a state where the base portion 4A and the sub base portion overlap with each other is set to 0 °, and the sub base portion is opened like a door from this state (by rotating with one end of the base portion 4A as a reference). ), When the opening angle in a state in which the sub-base portion is perpendicular to the base portion 4A is defined as 90 °, the setting angle of the sub-base portion is, for example, set within an angle range of 60 ° to 90 ° It can be an angle. If the installation angle is included in this angle range, the second display unit 440 cannot be viewed from the game position of the player who plays with the gaming machine, but the surrounding players from the end of the game island can see the second display unit. 440 can be visually recognized.

  In addition to the above, the second display unit 440 may be disposed on the main body side surface of the data display device 4 (both left and right side surfaces or one of the left and right side surfaces). That is, instead of providing the sub base portion so as to protrude from the base portion 4A toward the passage, the sub base portion may be provided on the side surface of the base portion 4A.

  In the first embodiment, the possessed ball special display is described as being displayed on the first display unit 430 of the data display device 4. However, the possessed ball is displayed on the second display unit 440 instead of the first display unit 430. A special display may be displayed.

FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of the display content setting table 681 stored in the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 6 in this case.
When this display content setting table 681 is viewed, the possessed ball special display is not defined in the display content of the first display unit 430. Instead, the display content of the second display unit 440 includes (1) possessed ball. Special indication is provided.

FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of the second display section display mode setting table 683b stored in the hard disk 680 of the hall computer 6 in this case.
Looking at the second display section display mode setting table 683b, the full screen possessed ball special display is defined as “pattern T” in the display mode of the second display section 440.

  In this case, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 generates display setting data 691 based on the above table and transmits the display setting data 691 to the data display device 4 so that the display setting of the data display device 4 is performed. Good.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the possessed ball special display displayed on the second display unit 440 in this case.
This figure shows an example of a display screen of a possessed ball special display when a dollar box is displayed as the first predetermined image and a special box is displayed as the second predetermined image on the second display unit 440. Note that the display method of the first predetermined image and the second predetermined image is the same as the display method described in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted here.

  Note that the possessed ball special display is not displayed on either one of the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4, but both the first display unit 430 and the second display unit 440 are displayed. It is good also as displaying a possessed ball special display on the display part.

  In addition, the second display unit 440 is not necessarily a display that displays information using characters or numbers, and may be an LED lamp that notifies the player of information by light emission. Specifically, for example, a sub-base portion in which a circular or polygonal LED (triangle, quadrangle, hexagon, etc.) LED lamp is formed is provided on the side surface of the data display device 4 (both left and right sides or one of the left and right sides). Thus, a side lamp can be configured. Moreover, it is good also as providing an LED lamp in the form which protrudes from the base | substrate part 4A to the channel | path side using a bridge | bridging. In this case, the processing unit 410 of the data display device 4 causes the LED lamp to emit information such as during the big hit of the pachinko machine 2, during the probability change, during the latent probability change, in the short time, and in the vacant platform, with different emission colors and emission patterns. It may be controlled to.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of a table configuration of a light emission setting table that is a table relating to the light emission setting of the LED lamp in this case. This light emission setting table can be stored in advance in a memory (storage device) of the hall computer 6. Then, the processing unit 610 of the hall computer 6 performs settings related to light emission of the second display unit 440 of the data display device 4 based on the light emission setting table.

  In the light emission setting table, the type, the number, and the light emission setting of the LED lamp are stored in association with each other. In the light emission setting of the LED lamp, notification contents, a light emission color, and a light emission pattern are determined. The notification contents are contents to be notified to the player by the emission color and the emission pattern.

  For example, in “empty base information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is an empty base, “blue” is set as the emission color and “lighting” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is an empty board, the LED lamp is controlled to be lit in blue.

  In the “hit information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is in a big hit, “red” is set as the emission color, and “flashing at time intervals of α seconds” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is an empty board, the LED lamp is controlled to blink in red.

  In the “latency probability change information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latency probability, “green” is defined as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of β seconds” is defined as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latent probability, the LED lamp is controlled to be lit in green.

  In the “latency probability change information” indicating that the pachinko machine 2 is changing the latency probability, “yellow” is set as the emission color and “flashing at a time interval of γ seconds” is set as the emission pattern. That is, when the pachinko machine 2 is running short, the LED lamp is controlled to be turned on in yellow.

  The correspondence relationship between the notification content related to the light emission setting of the LED lamp, the light emission color, and the light emission pattern is merely an example, and the design can be changed as appropriate. The time interval of blinking of the LED lamp (for example, the above-described α second, β second, and γ second) can be set as appropriate. Further, instead of causing the LED lamp to emit light with a fixed emission color, information may be transmitted to surrounding players by illumination combining various emission colors.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the data display device 4 receives the simultaneous effect display instruction signal from the hall computer 6, the simultaneous effect display is described. However, the simultaneous effect display may be performed based on the time measured by the clock unit 465 included in the data display device 4. In this case, the RTC 235 that is the clock unit included in the pachinko machine 2 and the clock unit 465 may be synchronized so that the simultaneous effect display is performed at the same timing as the pachinko machine 2 performs the simultaneous effect.

  In the big hit running effect, the hall computer 6 explained that the big hit running effect is performed by transmitting a display instruction signal for the big hit running effect to each data display device 4 with a delay of a predetermined delay time. However, the configuration for realizing the big hit running effect is not limited to this.

  For example, the data display devices 4 may be connected to each other using a predetermined communication cable, and a big hit running effect execution signal may be transmitted to each other using this communication cable. In this case, when the data display device 4 receives the big hit running effect execution signal from the adjacent data display device 4, the big hit running video is displayed by shifting the time by a predetermined time difference, and is displayed on the next data display device 4. A big hit running effect execution signal may be transmitted. That is, the big hit running effect can be realized by sequentially transmitting the big hit running effect execution signal according to the identification number of the data display device 4 in ascending order or descending order.

[4-3. Management device]
In the above embodiment, the management device (control device) according to the present invention has been described as the hall computer 6, but the management device is not limited to the hall computer 6. The terminal 10 installed for each amusement island may be used as a management apparatus, or a relay computer that relays between the terminal 10 and the hall computer 6 may be installed, and this relay computer may be used as the management apparatus according to the present invention. Moreover, it is good also considering the possession management computer 8 as the management apparatus which concerns on this invention.

  In addition, it does not allow the possession management computer 8 to manage member data, but installs a member management computer for managing member information and membership card information in the store separately from the hall computer 6 and the possession management computer 8. The member management computer may be a management device according to the present invention.

  A computer having two or three functions among the hall computer 6, the possession management computer 8, and the member management computer may be used as the management apparatus according to the present invention. That is, (1) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the ball management computer 8, (2) a computer having the functions of the hall computer 6 and the member management computer, and (3) the ball management computer 8 and the member management computer. (4) Any one of the computers having the functions of the hall computer 6, the possession management computer 8 and the member management computer may be used as the management apparatus according to the present invention.

[4-4. Volume setting / change]
The volume change described in the above embodiment is not limited to a step-by-step volume change by a player's tap operation on the touch panel or an operation key such as a cross key, but the jog dial is rotated or the stick lever is tilted. It is also possible to change the volume steplessly. In other words, it is not limited to changing the volume step by step by tapping the volume change icon or pressing the left and right keys of the cross key, but by continuously tilting the jog dial or stick lever. May be moved up and down.

  Further, in the various gaming devices described in the above embodiment, when the setting of the second volume level is not performed by the processing unit in a period in which the second permission condition that is a condition for the store is satisfied. The corresponding image (for example, “volume / light quantity change icon”) corresponding to the second permission condition being satisfied is displayed on the display unit, and the corresponding image is displayed on the display unit when the setting is restricted. Explained as not to. In this case, in the above embodiment, the change in both the volume and the light amount is restricted, but the change in either one of the volume and the light amount may be restricted. Moreover, you may restrict | limit either or both of a volume and a light quantity according to a channel.

In addition, you may make it further provide the alerting | reporting means which alert | reports that the setting is restrict | limited according to having performed 2nd operation when setting restriction | limiting is performed. For example, when the second operation is performed when the channel of the setting switch is “A” to “F”, a display message indicating that the volume cannot be changed is displayed on the display unit, or a warning such as a buzzer sound is given. The sound may be output to the sound output unit. That is, the display unit and the sound output unit may function as notification means.
According to this, it is possible to effectively notify the customer that the setting of the second volume level is restricted.

Instead of or in addition to a warning sound such as a buzzer sound, a display indicating that the volume cannot be changed may be displayed. Further, instead of or in addition to the display, a notification regarding the setting restriction may be performed by turning on or blinking a light emitting unit such as an effect lamp or a decoration LED. That is, the light emitting unit may function as a notification unit. The volume of the warning sound, the amount of lighting, etc. may be a set volume or amount of light, or may be a fixed volume or amount of light of a predetermined magnitude or more (for example, maximum). Note that the light-emitting body for notification may be provided exclusively for the notification.
This can also effectively notify the customer that the setting of the second volume level is restricted.

  In addition, the processing unit as the second setting means detects the predetermined timing when, for example, it is detected that a volume change operation is performed by a customer other than the player who has played a game before (for example, a new player). If established, the second volume level being set may be cleared, and the initial setting level (for example, the initial display volume) may be set as the second volume level. In this case, for example, when it is determined that the gaming machine has entered the operating state after a predetermined time has elapsed since it was determined that the gaming machine has entered the non-operating state, the second volume level being set is cleared. The initial setting stage may be set as the second volume stage. In addition, when it is determined that a game or payment by the player has not been performed for a predetermined time, or when the number of possessed balls by the counting payout unit 380 or the rental (lending) of game media has not been performed, It may be determined that the predetermined timing has been established.

  The first volume level set by the processing unit as the first setting means may be changed only based on the first operation (operation on the setting changeover switch). For example, since the setting changeover switch is a physical switch, it may not be reset.

  For example, the processing unit of the gaming device determines whether or not the player's game has ended in the volume setting process. And when it is determined that the game has ended, and the channel of the setting changeover switch is not “A” to “F”, that is, “0” to “9”, it corresponds to the state of the setting changeover switch. For example, the initial setting may be performed. In this case, in determining whether or not the player's game has ended, for example, (A) when no gaming signal is input from the gaming machine for a certain period of time, (B) an operation on the gaming device is performed for a certain period or more. (C) When a variety of information such as a two-dimensional code indicating game data displayed by the gaming device is output (performed based on various operations), (D) a predetermined password for the gaming device May be determined that the player's game has ended, for example, when the player inputs (based on various operations).

FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of a gaming system in which a player can use game data.
For example, at the end of the game on the pachinko machine 2, the player operates the touch panel while looking at the menu screen of the data display device 4 which is a kind of game device, and the game data relating to the game on the current pachinko machine 2 Is designated to the data display device 4 to output a two-dimensional code (QR code (registered trademark)). At this time, the processing unit of the data display device 4 causes the first display unit 430 to display a screen for outputting the two-dimensional code. The two-dimensional code is read by a player's mobile phone 901 or the like, and the data indicated by the two-dimensional code is transmitted to a predetermined management server 900 via a network such as the Internet.

  The management server 900 manages the data for each player, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the accumulation of the data (for example, the number of clear missions exceeds a predetermined number), a video that is normally viewed is displayed in the game. Distributed to the mobile phone 901 of the user. In this way, a privilege is granted to the player.

  As various information, a password having contents corresponding to the game may be output instead of the two-dimensional code at the end of the game, and the player may input the password at the start of the game. By inputting the password, for example, it is possible to change a password that cannot normally be changed in volume and light quantity. That is, a privilege related to a change in volume or light amount may be given to the player.

In the above-described embodiment, the hall computer 6 which is a kind of management device can set the volume changeable range, and various gaming devices can receive volume setting data 693 transmitted from the hall computer 6. As described above, the sound volume is set based on the above. However, instead of such a configuration, various game devices may operate stand-alone to perform volume setting. In this case, the volume setting data is stored in advance in the storage unit of the gaming apparatus, and the processing unit of the gaming apparatus sets the volume based on the volume setting data stored in the storage unit. You can do it.
The same applies to the setting of the light quantity.

  The “position of the displacement part” at which the first volume level is set may be any one of a plurality of positions where the displacement part can be located, or all of the plurality of positions where the displacement part can be located. Any of these may be sufficient. In this way, an operation unit such as a setting changeover switch may be configured. In addition, when “the stage display is displayed by the display control means”, in addition to the predetermined timing and the timing for displaying the stage display during the period in which the stage display is displayed, the timing at which the stage display is determined to be displayed, and the determination It is good also as the predetermined timing in the period until a stage display is displayed from the performed timing. The processing unit of the gaming device may set the volume at any one of these timings. The predetermined timing in this case may be, for example, when a predetermined event occurs.

  For example, when the second volume level set by the second setting unit is changed after the position of the displacement unit is changed, the processing unit changes the first volume level newly set by the first setting unit. The sound output unit may start outputting the sound having a volume corresponding to the sound. For example, the change of the channel of the setting changeover switch (change of the first volume level) and the change of the volume due to the change (reflection of the volume) are performed at the time of changing the volume (for example, when setting the second volume level) ).

  Note that the change in the first volume level may be performed internally, and the change in the actual volume may be reflected at the time of the volume change operation (for example, when the second volume level is set). For example, when the channel of the setting changeover switch is configured to be input to a predetermined input port such as a processing unit at the time of channel switching, the input content is not software when the processing unit is changing the channel, not when switching the channel. It is also possible to reflect the change in the volume (setting the volume) by going to the reading and setting the volume by setting the second volume level based on the read content. Further, the second volume level is set based on the input content read by the processing unit in software (reading is performed at the time of channel switching) (may be at the time of channel switching or at the time of changing operation) Setting the volume based on the second volume level at the time of a change operation or the like may be a reflection of the change in volume (setting the volume).

Further, “when the second volume level set by the second setting means is changed” means that the second volume level is newly set when the second operation is performed (during the second operation) or when the second operation is performed. It may be set when it is set (at the time of setting the second volume level, etc.).
In addition, the said structure is good also as applying similarly about light quantity.

  Further, even if there is an operation for changing the volume or light amount, the volume level or light amount stage to be highlighted is changed, but the setting of the volume or light amount may not be performed until the setting operation is performed. For example, on the volume etc. changing screen, the store visitor including the player changes the volume level and the light intensity level to be highlighted by operating the operation buttons, and finally presses the push button. By pressing the push button, the processing unit sets the second volume level and the second light level according to the volume level and the light level highlighted at that time, and sets the volume and the light level. Good (in this case, the volume level and the light intensity level to be highlighted indicate the second volume level and the second light intensity level to be set).

  For example, when a volume determination operation or a light amount determination operation is performed, a change in volume or light amount may be set. In addition, even if there is an operation of the setting changeover switch, that operation is not reflected when the setting screen display starts, and when there is an operation to change the volume display (an operation to change the highlighted volume level), The first volume level may be set. In addition, when there is an operation for changing the light amount display (an operation for changing the light amount step for highlighting), the first light amount step may be set.

  The first volume stage and the first light quantity stage are set before that (for example, when a channel is operated), and the change of the volume based on the first volume stage and the first light quantity stage and the light quantity are changed during the change operation. Change settings may be made. These changes may be set at the time of determining the volume and the amount of light. In this case, the volume and light amount are set using the second sound volume step and the second light amount step.

The present invention can be variously modified and applied to the above-described embodiments and the like.
The gaming device may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and a part of the configuration described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the setting changeover switch is provided as an operation means that can be operated by the store side. However, the operation means may be a touch panel, an operation button, an operation key, or the like. As the time when the operation is performed on the store side, the first volume level and the first light quantity level may be set with the touch panel, the operation button, or the like within the predetermined period. That is, the operation target of the first operation and the operation target of the second operation may be the same.

  Instead of the setting changeover switch, a jog dial, a cross key, or the like may be provided as an operation means. Further, the operation means that can be operated by the player side may be a dedicated operation device for setting the volume and light amount, such as a changeover switch, a jog dial, and a cross key.

  Further, the adjustment of the light quantity may be performed by an operation device different from the adjustment of the volume. In the above embodiment, the setting changeover switch is exemplified as “an operation device including a displacement unit that is physically displaced by a first operation at any one of a plurality of positions corresponding to a plurality of stages that the first volume stage can take”. However, the operation device may be a rotary fader or jog dial in which a displacement part (knob or the like) rotates, a linear fader in which the displacement part (knob or the like) moves in the vertical or horizontal direction, or the like.

  Displacement includes rotation, movement in the up-down direction, and left-right direction. The displacement unit may be one that moves stepwise, such as a setting changeover switch, or one that moves continuously (for example, a fader). Further, the position where the displacement part is displaced (in the case of rotation, it may be expressed by a rotation angle, etc.) and the plurality of positions corresponding to the plurality of stages that the first volume stage can take correspond one-to-one. It does not have to be. For example, one stage among a plurality of stages that can be taken by the first volume stage may be set in correspondence with a plurality of positions where the displacement unit can be displaced.

  The operation of the operating means that can be operated on the store side is not limited to when the power is turned on, and may be performed at any time. That is, the first permission condition may always be satisfied.

  The first permission condition is a condition for an amusement store. When this condition is satisfied, it is assumed that, in principle, an operation is performed by a store manager or a store clerk. The operation of the operating means that can be operated by the customer (the operation of changing the volume level and the light amount by changing the second volume level and the second light level step) may be performed at any time. That is, the second permission condition may always be satisfied.

  In addition, the second permission condition is a condition for customers including a player, and when this condition is established, it is assumed that an operation is performed by the player in principle. In addition, a store manager or a store clerk may perform operations for business.

  Further, when the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light by the customer is restricted, the volume and the amount of light may be minimized or maximized. Moreover, when limiting, you may make it transfer to power saving mode. In the above-described embodiment, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is changed, the highest level is maintained when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is increased when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is the highest level. However, you may make it move to the minimum step. In the above-described embodiment, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is changed, when the second volume level or the second light intensity level is the lowest level, the lowest level is maintained by performing an operation to lower the level. However, it may be shifted to the maximum stage.

  In addition, the display configuration in the display unit and the sound output operation in the sound output unit for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming device, the processing shown in the flowchart, and the lighting in the effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including the operation can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the game device, but in advance a computer device It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by pre-installing the storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention adopt a form in which a communication processing unit is provided and distributed by downloading from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. It doesn't matter.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the confirmation sound output timer is counting in the volume change process, the volume adjustment operation described later is invalid, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the confirmation sound output timer, a timer that counts the elapse of a predetermined time from the time when the previous volume adjustment operation was performed is provided, and the subsequent volume adjustment operation is invalidated while the timer is counting. You may make it.

  Further, the player may change the volume (setting the second volume level) at any time. In that case, it is desirable that a dedicated button for changing the volume is provided separately so that the volume can be changed with this dedicated button.

  In the above embodiment, the sound volume is determined by using two sound volume levels, ie, a first sound volume level that is changed by an operation on the game shop side and a second sound volume level that is changed by a player's operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the volume may be set using one of the volume levels. For example, the volume may be changed using only the second volume level without providing the first volume level setting function. Alternatively, the volume may be changed using only the first volume level without providing the setting function for the second volume level.

  In addition, the volume setting in the gaming apparatus is not always possible to set the volume like the volume setting in a general home TV, etc., when the specific sound is muted or the volume is lowered, In other words, when a screen that does not output a specific sound (for example, a display screen such as a game data screen) is displayed or a screen that outputs a specific sound (for example, a display screen such as a running effect screen) is being displayed, The volume may be set when the volume of the specific sound to be played is low. Advantages obtained in this way are that when a confirmation sound corresponding to the changed volume is output, the player can easily confirm the sound, and the specific sound is muted or the volume is reduced. In this state, the processing related to the volume setting is not executed, so that the processing load on the processing unit can be reduced.

  Further, the setting / changing of the volume and the light amount may be executable regardless of whether or not a game is being played in the corresponding gaming machine. However, in this case, when other processing such as display processing for performing a predetermined display or sound output processing for outputting a predetermined sound is performed in the gaming device, the setting / change of the volume and the light amount are limited. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, in addition to the hall computer 6, the above-described management-side host device such as the possession management computer 8 or member management computer is used to set the volume and light amount in the gaming device individually or in groups. Also good. As described above, the group unit can be a gaming machine type unit or a gaming island unit in which a gaming machine is installed. In these group units, the volume of the gaming device provided corresponding to the gaming machine, The amount of light may be set.

  In the above embodiment, the gaming device is described as having the setting changeover switch. However, the gaming device may not be provided with the setting changeover switch. In this case, as described in the modification of the above-described embodiment, the channel setting may be transmitted from the management device such as the hall computer to the gaming device. In this case, the gaming device sets the volume and the amount of light based on the channel setting transmitted from the management device, and the setting by the management device is replaced with the first setting.

  Further, it is assumed that the volume changeable range varies depending on the manufacturer that manufactures the gaming apparatus. For example, when there are a plurality of manufacturers that manufacture the data display device 4, the volume changeable range may differ between the A company and the B company. Therefore, the hall computer 6 stores a volume setting table for each manufacturer that can set the volume changeable range of the data display device 4 for each manufacturer, and the data display device 4 for each manufacturer according to this volume setting table for each manufacturer. It is preferable that the volume setting including the volume changeable range can be performed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Game system 1A 1st game system 1B 2nd game system 1C 3rd game system 2 Pachinko machine 2B Enclosed pachinko machine 3 Card unit 4 Data display device 5 Inter-unit counting unit 6 Hall computer 7 Each counter 8 Mochitama management computer 9 Calling lamp device 10 terminals

Claims (8)

A gaming device provided corresponding to a gaming machine,
An operation unit;
A sound output unit;
Volume setting means for setting the volume of the specific sound output from the sound output unit;
Volume changing means for changing the volume set by the volume setting means according to the operation of the operation unit; and
A confirmation sound output means for outputting a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume set by the volume setting means after the operation when the operation section is operated;
With
The volume setting means can set the volume within a predetermined range;
In the confirmation sound output means, when the volume set by the volume setting means is within the limit of the predetermined range, the operation unit is operated so as to change the volume outside the limit of the predetermined range. In some cases, the game apparatus is characterized in that a confirmation sound corresponding to the volume limit of the predetermined range is output from the sound output unit. A gaming device according to claim 1,
The game apparatus further comprising volume change restriction means for restricting volume change by the volume change means when the sound output section is outputting the specific sound. A gaming device according to claim 1 or 2,
A display unit;
Based on the first operation being performed when the first permission condition for the store where the gaming apparatus is installed is satisfied, one of the plurality of volume levels is set to the first volume level. First setting means for setting as:
Based on the second operation being performed when a second permission condition for a customer including a player who plays a game on the gaming machine is satisfied, one of the plurality of volume levels is set to the first volume level. A second setting means for setting as two volume levels;
Specific sound output control means for outputting the specific sound from the sound output section at a volume based on the first volume stage set by the first setting means and the second volume stage set by the second setting means;
Display control means for performing control to display a stage display indicating the second volume stage on the display unit when the second operation is performed;
A gaming apparatus, further comprising: A gaming device according to claim 3,
An operating device having a displacement portion configured to be displaceable to any one of positions corresponding to a plurality of volume levels that can be taken by the first volume level according to the first operation;
The first setting means sets a first volume level corresponding to a position of the displacement portion displaced according to the first operation as a first volume level based on the first operation. apparatus. A gaming device according to claim 3 or 4, wherein
The plurality of volume levels that can be taken by the first volume level includes a limit level that restricts the second setting means from setting the second volume level,
When the restriction stage is set as the first sound volume stage by the first setting means, the apparatus further comprises setting restriction means for restricting setting that the second setting means restricts the setting of the second sound volume stage. A gaming device characterized by that. A gaming device according to claim 5,
The information processing device further comprises notification means for notifying that the setting of the second volume level is restricted when the second operation is performed when the setting restriction is performed by the setting restriction means. A gaming device to play. A gaming device according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
Provided in a store where the gaming machine is installed, further comprising setting receiving means for receiving the setting of the predetermined range from a management device capable of setting the predetermined range for each gaming device;
The game apparatus, wherein the volume setting means sets the volume based on the setting received by the setting receiving means. A gaming device according to any one of claims 1 to 7,
The gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be played using a gaming medium,
The gaming device is:
A display unit capable of displaying an image;
Display control processing for displaying a predetermined image on the display unit when the number of game media possessed by the player reaches a first value, and when the predetermined image is displayed on the display unit Even if the number of possessed game media falls below the first value, if the predetermined value is reached by a predetermined number smaller than the first value, the predetermined image is not hidden and falls below the second value. Display processing means capable of executing a non-display control process for making the predetermined image non-display;
A gaming device, further comprising:

Images